Bmw 2006 530I Sedan Owners Manual

Bmw-2006-525I-Sedan-Owners-Manual-761977 bmw-2006-525i-sedan-owners-manual-761977

Bmw-2006-530Xi-Sedan-Owners-Manual-694375 bmw-2006-530xi-sedan-owners-manual-694375

Bmw-2006-550I-Sedan-Owners-Manual-694376 bmw-2006-550i-sedan-owners-manual-694376

Bmw-2006-525I-Sedan-Owners-Manual-694372 bmw-2006-525i-sedan-owners-manual-694372

Bmw-2006-525Xi-Sedan-Owners-Manual-694373 bmw-2006-525xi-sedan-owners-manual-694373

2015-04-13

: Bmw Bmw-2006-530I-Sedan-Owners-Manual-694374 bmw-2006-530i-sedan-owners-manual-694374 bmw pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 259

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Owner's Manual
for Vehicle

The Ultimate
Driving Machine

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Contents
A-Z

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

525i
530i
550i
525xi
530xi

Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical features. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service
life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

© 2006 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts,
only with the written consent of
BMW AG, Munich.
Order No. 01 41 0 012 211
US English II/06, 06 03 500
Printed in Germany
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance
10
16
22

Cockpit
iDrive
Voice command system

Controls
28
45
54
58
74
85

Opening and closing
Adjustments
Transporting children safely
Driving
Everything under control
Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety
101 Lamps
105 Climate
111 Practical interior accessories

209 Maintenance
211 Replacing components
219 Giving and receiving assistance

226 Technical data
231 Short commands of voice command
system
236 Everything from A to Z

Driving tips
124 Things to remember when driving

Navigation
132
133
144
149

Starting navigation system
Destination entry
Destination guidance
What to do if …

Entertainment
152
156
165
171

At a glance

Reference

On/off and tone
Radio
CD player and CD changer
External audio device

Communications

Reference

174 Telephoning
187 TeleService, BMW Assist

Driving tips

Notes
Reporting safety defects

Navigation

4
7

194 Refueling
196 Wheels and tires
204 Under the hood

Communications Entertainment

Using this Owner's Manual

Mobility

The fastest way to find specific topics is to use
the index, refer to page 236.

Controls

Contents

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Notes

Notes
Using this Owner's Manual

Symbols used

We have made every effort to ensure that you
are able to find what you need in this Owner's
Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way
to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.

Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.

Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual
as well; it is an important component of your
vehicle.

Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
You can find information on BMW, e.g. on technology, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
< Marks the end of a specific item of information.

* Indicates special equipment, country-specific equipment and optional extras, as well as
equipment and functions not yet available at the
time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
command system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice command system.

Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.

4
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Please bear in mind that the manual may contain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equipment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehicle's equipment.

Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. Therefore, have corresponding work on your BMW performed only
by your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is
not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<

If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accompanying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Navigation

Editorial notice

At a glance

Maintenance and repairs

Controls

When purchasing your BMW, you have decided
in favor of a model with individualized equipment and features. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equipment available with a specific BMW model.

For your own safety

Driving tips

The individual vehicle

5
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible that the features described
in this Owner's Manual could differ from those
on your vehicle.

Notes

Parts and accessories

California Proposition 65 Warning

For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts,
you simultaneously acquire the assurance that
they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to
ensure optimum performance when installed
on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation or its occupants.
Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or
similar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect
the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See
your BMW center for additional information.<

California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.<

6
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

The following applies only to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-8311117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers

7
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510,
or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C,
330 Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.

At a glance

Your BMW is covered by the following warranties:

Controls

For US customers

Driving tips

We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.

Navigation

Reporting safety defects

Communications Entertainment

Service and warranty

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Cockpit

Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

Sedan: sun blind* for rear window 112

Rear window safety switch 41

Opening and closing windows 40

Adjusting exterior mirror 51
Automatic parking function* 52

Turn signal 64
High beams,
headlamp flasher 102
High-beam assistant* 103
Roadside parking lamps 102
Check Control 79
Computer 75

10
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

> Press longer: redialing

Steering wheel adjustment 52

Activating/deactivating voice
command system* 22
Changing radio station
Selecting music track
Scrolling in phone book and in lists
with stored phone numbers

14 Releasing hood 204
15 Opening luggage compartment lid/
tailgate 35, 33
16

Individually programmable 53

Head-Up Display* 96
BMW Night Vision* 98

Individually programmable* 53

Cruise control* 66
Active cruise control* 67

Volume

Steering wheel heater* 52

Instrument cluster 12

Parking lamps 101
Low beams 101
Automatic headlamp control* 101
Adaptive Head Light* 102
High-beam assistant* 103

Windshield wipers 65
Rain sensor 65
Sports Wagon: rear window
wiper 66

Instrument lighting 104
Fog lamps* 104

At a glance

Starting/stopping engine and
switching ignition on/off 58

Controls

> Press: accepting and ending
call, starting dialing* for
selected phone number and
redialing if no phone number is
selected

Driving tips

Mobile phone* 174:

11 Horn: entire surface

Navigation

Buttons on steering wheel

Communications Entertainment

11
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

10 Ignition lock 58

Cockpit

Instrument cluster

Indicator lamps for turn signals

Speedometer

> Odometer and trip odometer 74

Indicator and warning lamps 13

> Computer 75

Displays for active cruise control* 70

Tachometer 74

> Date and remaining travel distance
for service requirements 77

Energy Control 75

Display for

> Automatic transmission with
Steptronic* 63
> SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission* 61

> Clock/date 74
> Outside temperature 74

> HDC Hill Descent Control* 88

> Indicator and warning lamps 79

> High-beam assistant* 103

> Speed of cruise control* 66
> Desired speed for active cruise
control* 67

Displays for

>
9

Check Control message present 79

Fuel gauge 75

10 Resetting trip odometer 74

12
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Handbrake engaged 60

Some lights are tested for proper function by
briefly lighting up during starting of the engine
or when the ignition is switched on.

Explanatory text messages

Fog lamps* 104
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 87

At a glance

High beams/headlamp flasher 102
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC controls the drive and
braking forces for maintaining vehicle
stability 87

Communications Entertainment

Indicator and warning lamps can light up both in
the display area 1 and in the display 2 in various
combinations and colors.

Handbrake engaged for Canadian
models

Controls

The following indicator lamps in the display
area 1 indicate that the associated functions
are activated:

Driving tips

Indicator lamps without text messages

Navigation

The concept

In the case of corresponding urgency, this information is displayed immediately when the
related lamp lights up.

Mobility

Text message at the bottom edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

Additional information, e.g. on the cause of a
malfunction and on the corresponding need to
take action can be displayed via the Check Control, refer to page 79.
13
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Indicator and warning lamps

Cockpit

Around the center console: controls and displays

14
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Initiating an emergency call 219

Interior lamps 104

Glass sunroof*, electric 41
Panorama glass sunroof* 43

Passenger airbag status lamp 95

Control Display 16
Displays for menu navigation

Hazard warning flashers

Central locking system 32

10 Automatic climate control 105

13 Drive for navigation DVDs* 132
14 Drive for audio CDs 152
15 Switching Entertainment sound output on/
off and adjusting volume 152
16

Heated seats* 50
Active seat ventilation* 51
Adjusting active backrest
width* 47
Active seat* 51

Temperature setting, left/
right 106

PDC Park Distance Control* 85

Automatic air distribution and
volume 106

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 87

Cooling function 107
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control 108

17 Controller 16
Turn, press or move horizontally in four
directions

Recirculated-air mode 108

18 Activating voice command system* 22
19 Opening start menu on Control Display 17

Maximum cooling 107

At a glance

> audio CD 152

Controls

Reading lamps 104

> navigation DVD* 132

20 Dynamic Driving Control* 62

Residual heat mode 108
Switching off automatic climate
control 108
Air volume 107
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation 107

Driving tips

12 Ejecting

Navigation

Microphone for handsfree mode for
telephone*
and for voice command system* 22

Communications Entertainment

Mobility

Rear window defroster 105
11 Changing
> radio station 152

15
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

> track 152

iDrive

iDrive
iDrive combines the functions of a large number
of switches. This allows these functions to be
operated from a central position. The following
section provides an introduction to basic menu

navigation. The control of the individual functions is described in connection with the relevant equipment.

Controls

Control Display

button
Opening start menu

Controller
With the controller you can select menu
items and make settings:

To avoid posing an unnecessary hazard
due to inattention, both to your own vehicle's occupants and to other road users: never
attempt to use the controls or make entries
unless traffic and road conditions allow.<

> move in four directions, arrows 4
> turn, arrow 5
> press, arrow 6

16
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

> BMW Assist* or TeleService*

> Navigation system*
> Onboard information, e.g. for displaying
the average fuel consumption

Entertainment
> Radio
> CD player and CD changer*
> External audio device

Climate
> Air distribution
> Seat air conditioning*
> Automatic program

To clear the message:
Press the controller.
This displays the start menu.
On vehicles with a single drive, the message
automatically disappears after approx. 10 seconds.

Start menu

> Parked car ventilation*

menu
> Switching off Control Display
> Tone and display settings
> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central
locking system
> Display of service requirements and dates
for statutory emission and vehicle inspections
> Settings for telephone

At a glance
Controls

Navigation or onboard information

You can call up all the functions of iDrive using
five menu items.

Opening start menu
Press the

button.

Driving tips

> Telephone*

From radio readiness, refer to page 58, the following message is shown on the Control Display:

Navigation

Communication

Operating principle

Communications Entertainment

Menu overview

To open the start menu from the menu:
button twice.

17
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Press the

iDrive

Opening menu items of start menu

Displays in menu

With the start menu you can open the menu
items Communication, Navigation, Entertainment and Climate by moving the controller to
the left, right, front or rear.

Each menu is divided into fields. The
respective active field is highlighted.

A symbol indicates the last selected menu
item of the start menu:

You can open the menu by pressing the controller.

Communication

Comfort opening of menu items

Navigation or onboard information

Comfort opening offers you:
> Opening of a menu item of the start menu in
the last display shown

Entertainment

> Direct switching between Communication,
Navigation, Entertainment and Climate
without pressing the
button

Climate
menu

For this purpose, move the controller in the corresponding direction and hold it for longer than
approx. 2 seconds.

Menu items are usually grouped in horizontal or vertical lists.

In these lists, arrows indicate the possibility
of accessing other menu items that are not
currently visible.

Settings are displayed graphically or
numerically.

18
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

You can view the individual steps under Settings on Control Display, Setting time, refer to
page 82.

> Menu items shown in white can be
selected by highlighting

> Active field appears lighter

Activating menu item:
> Press the controller
> New menu items are displayed or the
function is carried out

> Release controller

Selecting menu item: refer to 1

Adjusting settings:
> Turn controller
> Graphic display, numerical value or text
displays can be changed
> Acknowledgment by changing field

19
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Changing between fields:
> Briefly move the controller left, right,
forward or back

> Turn the controller; the highlight moves

Mobility

Selecting menu item:

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

Basic operation via iDrive is described in this
view.

At a glance

Operating principle at a glance

iDrive

Status information

Assistance window*

Additional information can be displayed in the
assistance window:

Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD
> Telephone* in "Communication":
Name of linked mobile phone, network
search or no network
> "BMW Assist"*:
Existing voice connection with a service
from BMW Assist

Entertainment sound output off

Display for:
>

> The computer or the trip computer*
> The arrow or map view with a navigation
system*
> The current position

Selecting display
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the controller.

New entries present in "Missed calls"*

Roaming active

Telephoning* possible if the mobile
phone is logged-on in the vehicle
Mobile phone network with strong
reception, display dependent on mobile
phone

Time

Other displays:
The status information is temporarily hidden
when there are Check Control instructions or
inputs via the voice command system*.

2. Select a menu item.
3. Press the controller.

20
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

Switching assistance window off/on
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the controller.

Driving tips

Controls

2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the
controller.

Navigation

To switch on, change to the assistance window
and press the controller.

Switching Control Display
off/on

Communications Entertainment

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Display off" and press the controller.

21
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

To switch on, press the controller.

Voice command system

Voice command system*
The concept
The voice command system allows you to control operation of various vehicle systems without ever removing your hands from the steering
wheel.

Voice commands
Activating voice command system
1. Press the

button.

Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. This frees you of
having to use the controller.
The voice command system transforms your
oral commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
The voice command system uses a special
microphone located in the area of the interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 14.

Precondition

This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal tell you that the voice
command system can respond to commands.

Via iDrive, set the language that applies for the
voice command system in order to enable identification of the spoken commands. To set the
language of iDrive, refer to page 84.

Symbols in Owner's Manual
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice
command system.

2. Say the command.
The command is displayed on the Control
Display.

This symbol is shown on the Control Display
when you can input additional commands.

22
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

{Cancel}

3. {Entertainment}
The system says:
{{Entertainment}}

Commands

Driving tips

Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the system read aloud the possible commands related to the selected menu
item on the Control Display.
To have the system list the possible commands:
{Options}
For example, if you have selected "CD", the
system will read aloud the possible commands
for operating the CD player and the CD
changer*.

4. {CD}
The system says:
{{CD drive switched on}}

Opening help
{Help}

Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}

Running functions directly with short
commands
With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected, refer to page 231.

At a glance
Controls

Press the
button on the steering wheel or in
the center console
or

2. Press the
button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.

5. Press the
button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.
6. Select track, e.g.:
{Track 1}
The system says:
{{Track 1}}

Navigation

Terminating or canceling voice
command system

Example: selecting a track
1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if
necessary.

Communications Entertainment

If no other commands are possible, then operate the equipment using iDrive.

{Main menu}

23
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Opening start menu

Voice command system

Notes
The mobile phone can also be operated
with voice commands, refer to
page 183.<
For voice commands, bear the following in
mind:
> Say the commands and numbers smoothly
and at normal volume, avoiding excessive
emphasis and pauses. This also applies to
spelling when entering the destination.
> Always issue commands in the language of
the voice command system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
common pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice command system and no abbreviations.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof* or panorama glass sunroof* closed to
avoid interfering outside noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.

24
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

At a glance

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
Its extensive array of features and accessories,
both for driving and for your own safety,
comfort and convenience, are described here.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Opening and closing

Opening and closing
Keys/remote control

Remote control with integrated key

Spare key

Adapter for spare key, in glove compartment

Integrated key

Press the button 1 to unlock the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Glove compartment, refer to page 113
> Sports Wagon: floor panel flap in cargo area,
refer to page 118

Remote control with integrated key

> Driver's door, refer to page 32

Each remote control contains a battery which is
automatically charged in the ignition lock while
driving. Drive a longer distance with each
remote control at least twice a year to keep the
battery charged. For comfort access*, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
refer to page 40.

> Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 33.

Depending on which remote control is detected
by the vehicle during unlocking, different settings are called up and carried out in the vehicle,
refer to Personal Profile, page 29.

Spare key

Information on the required maintenance is also
stored in the remote control, refer to Service
data in remote control, page 209.

New remote controls
To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new
remote controls with an integrated key are
available at your BMW center.

Store the spare key in a safe place such as your
wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.
The spare key and integrated key fit the same
locks.

Adapter for spare key
The adapter is required so that the vehicle can
be started with the spare key or radio readiness
can be switched on.

28
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 83

At a glance

> Settings for the display on the Control Display:

This means that you will always find your BMW
set to your own personal settings even if
another person with his/her own remote control
and settings has used the vehicle since the last
time you drove it. The individual settings are
stored for a maximum of four remote controls.

Personal Profile settings
Details on the settings are provided on the
specified pages.
> When unlocking with the remote control,
either unlock only the driver's door or the
entire vehicle, refer to page 30
> Locking the vehicle after a short time or
after starting off, refer to page 32
> Assigning the programmable buttons* on
the steering wheel, refer to page 53

> Selection and brightness of display in
Head-Up Display*, refer to page 97
> Display settings of BMW Night Vision*,
refer to page 99
> Air distribution, temperature in the upper
body area and intensity of the automatic air
conditioning system, refer to page 106
> Setting voice instructions for destination
guidance in the navigation system*, refer to
page 147
In addition, the following, most recently
selected settings are recalled during unlocking:
> Positions of driver's seat, outside mirrors,
and steering wheel*, refer to page 47
> Audio sources, volume and tone settings,
refer to page 153
> Radio, displaying stored stations, refer to
page 156
> Telephone, setting volume, refer to
pages 178, 184

Navigation

You can set a number of functions of your BMW
individually according to your preferences. Personal Profile ensures that most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently
in use without you having to do anything. When
the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding
remote control is detected and the settings
stored for it are called up and carried out.

> Showing optical warning for PDC Park Distance Control*, refer to page 85

Communications Entertainment

The concept

> Date format, refer to page 83

Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system is ready for operation whenever the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
29

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

Personal Profile

> 12h/24h mode of the clock, refer to
page 83

Reference

Remove the adapter from the holder in the
glove compartment and slide the spare key into
the adapter before use.

Driving tips

> Language on Control Display, refer to
page 84

Controls

> Measuring units for consumption, route/
distances, temperature, and pressure,
refer to page 84

Opening and closing

> Luggage compartment lid or tailgate and
rear window
> Fuel filler door

Operating from outside
> via the remote control
> via the door lock

You can set how the vehicle is unlocked. The
setting is stored for the remote control currently
in use.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

> with comfort access* via the door handles

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

At the same time, the anti-theft system is also
operated. It prevents the doors from being
unlocked using the lock buttons or door handles. The interior lamps and the courtesy
lamps* are also switched on and off with the
remote control. The alarm system is armed/
disarmed at the same time.
You can find more detailed information on the
alarm system on page 37.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Door locks" and press the controller.

Operating from inside
Via the button for central locking, refer to
page 32. The fuel filler door is not locked.
In an accident of sufficient severity, the central
locking system automatically unlocks the vehicle. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and
interior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: from
outside
Sports Wagon with xDrive: the vehicle is
raised somewhat at the rear after locking.
This is normal and is linked to minor noises.<

Using remote control
Because any persons or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle could lock the
doors from the inside, you should always keep
the remote control with you; this precaution
ensures that you will remain able to unlock the
vehicle from the outside at all times.<

5. Select "Central locking" and press the controller.
6. Select "Unlock button" and press the controller.
7. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the
button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Press the
button once to unlock only
the driver's door and the fuel filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.

Unlocking
Press the
button.
This unlocks the vehicle.
8. Press the controller.
30
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

With vehicle locked:
Press the
button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.

Setting confirmation signals
You can vary or also deactivate the confirmation
signals for locking or unlocking.
1. Open the start menu.

Panic mode*

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

You can also trigger the alarm system in case of
danger:

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.

Press the

4. Select "Door locks" and press the controller.

button for at least 3 seconds.

Switch off alarm: press any button.

Sedan: opening luggage
compartment lid
Press the

5. Select "Confirmation" and press the controller.

button for approx. 1 second.

The luggage compartment lid opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or
unlocked.
During opening, the luggage compartment lid pivots back and up. Ensure that
adequate clearance is available before opening.
To prevent accidentally locking yourself out,
never lay the remote control in the luggage
compartment. A previously locked luggage
compartment lid is also locked again after closing.<

6. Select the desired signal.
7. Press the controller.
The signal is activated.

Sports Wagon: unlocking tailgate

Malfunctions

Press the

The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. Should the remote control fail
to operate owing to interference of this kind,
unlock and lock the vehicle via the door lock
using a key.

button for approx. 1 second.

The tailgate will open slightly, regardless of
whether it was previously locked or unlocked.
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.
To prevent accidentally locking yourself out,
never lay the remote control in the luggage
compartment. A previously locked tailgate is
also locked again after closing.

If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle
using the remote control, then the battery is
discharged. Use this remote control during an
extended drive; this will recharge the battery,
refer to page 28.

31
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance
Controls

Switching on interior lamps

Driving tips

button.

Navigation

Press the

If pointed or sharp-edged objects could
strike the rear window while driving, be
sure to provide protection around all edges.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the
heating conductors of the rear window.<

Communications Entertainment

Locking

Mobility

Press the
button longer. The windows and
the glass sunroof* open.

When opening the tailgate, the roll-up cover is
raised. Before closing the tailgate, press down
the roll-up cover until it engages.<

Reference

Convenience opening

Opening and closing

For US owners only

Convenience operation

The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:

You also have the option of operating the windows and the glass sunroof* from the driver's
door lock.

FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
LX8CAS2

Turn and hold the key in the positions for
unlocking or locking.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Releasing the
key stops the operation.<

Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful interference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
turn a key all the way to the right or left in the
door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.

Opening and closing: from
inside

Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<

Using door lock

This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the luggage compartment lid or tailgate and
rear window with the front doors closed, but
does not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel
filler door remains unlocked.

When unlocking

You can also set the situations in which the
vehicle is locked.

1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
door and the fuel filler door.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.

2. Turning the key a second time unlocks the
remaining doors and the luggage compartment lid/tailgate.

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Door locks" and press the controller.

32
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

> "Relock door if not opened"
The central locking system automatically locks the vehicle after a short time
when no door has been opened.
> "Lock after driving"
The central locking system automatically locks the vehicle as soon as you
start to drive.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock the doors together with the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or

To close the doors, merely press it closed gently. The closing process will then be carried out
automatically.
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; as otherwise injuries may
result.<

Luggage compartment lid/
tailgate
During opening, the luggage compartment lid/tailgate pivots back and up.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.<

Sedan
Opening from inside

> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.

Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.

Press the button: the luggage compartment lid
opens unless it has been locked.

33
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips

6. Select a menu item:

Navigation

Automatic soft closing*

Communications Entertainment

Doors

Mobility

Because any persons or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle could lock the
doors from the inside, you should always keep
the remote control with you; this precaution
ensures that you will remain able to unlock the
vehicle from the outside at all times.<

Reference

5. Select "Central locking" and press the controller.

Opening and closing

Opening from outside

alarm is inadvertently triggered: switch off the
alarm, refer to page 38.<

Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the
luggage compartment lid is clear, otherwise injuries may result.<

Press the button on the luggage compartment
lid or the
button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second: the luggage compartment lid
opens.

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull
down.

Emergency release

All keys, refer to page 28, fit the luggagecompartment lid lock.

Locking separately
Turn a key in the lock of the luggage compartment lid to the right past a resistance point and
remove it in the horizontal position.
This locks the luggage compartment lid and
disconnects it from the central locking system.
If you then hand over the remote control without
the integrated key, refer to page 28, no access
is possible via the luggage compartment lid.
This is an advantage when using valet parking,
for example.

Pull lever in luggage compartment. The luggage compartment lid is unlocked.

Sports Wagon: opening and closing
rear window
Small items can be loaded and unloaded
quickly when the rear window is opened separately.

Unlocking again and opening manually
Turn the key toward the left up to the stop: the
luggage compartment lid opens.
If you use the lock to unlock the luggage
compartment lid while the alarm system
is armed, the alarm will be triggered. You should
therefore unlock the vehicle ahead of time. If the

34
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Press the button: the rear window opens somewhat. It can be swung upward.
Press the button: the tailgate opens somewhat
unless it has been locked.

Opening from outside

Automatic roll-up cover*
When opening the rear window, the roll-up
cover is raised, and when the rear window is
closed, it is lowered.
Make sure that the closing area of the rollup cover is clear of obstructions, as otherwise the payload or the roll-up cover may be
damaged.<

Press the button on the tailgate or the
button on the remote control for approx. 1 second:
the tailgate opens somewhat. It can be swung
upward.

Details on the roll-up cover are provided on
page 117.

When opening the tailgate, the roll-up
cover is raised. Before closing the tailgate, press down the roll-up cover until it
engages.<

35
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Mobility

When opening the rear window, the rollup cover is raised. Before closing the rear
window, press down the roll-up cover until it
engages.<

Reference

Press the window closed to close.

Driving tips

Controls

Opening from inside

At a glance

Sports Wagon: tailgate

Opening and closing

Opening manually
In case of an electrical defect:
1. From the cargo area, press out the cover 1
on the tailgate with a screwdriver.

Sports Wagon: automatic tailgate
operation*
Adjusting opening height
You can adjust how far the tailgate is to open.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.

2. Press the locking bar 2 in the direction of
the arrow.

4. Select "Door locks" and press the controller.
5. Select "Tailgate" and press the controller.

3. Open the tailgate and press in the cover
again.
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is
closed.

Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the tailgate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<
6. Turn the controller. The adjustment is
applied; the field can be changed.

Opening tailgate
The tailgate opens automatically when you:
> Press the button on the outside of the tailgate when the vehicle is unlocked.

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
tailgate make it easier to pull down.
To close the tailgate, merely press it down gently. The closing process will then be carried out
automatically.

36
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance
The tailgate closes automatically when the button on the inside of the tailgate is pressed.

> Press the button on the outside of the tailgate.
> Press and hold the
control.

button on the remote

> Press the button on the inside of the tailgate.

Automatic roll-up cover
When the tailgate or rear window is opened, the
roll-up cover is raised, and when the tailgate
and rear window is closed, it is lowered.
Make sure that the closing area of the rollup cover is clear of obstructions, as otherwise the payload or the roll-up cover may be
damaged.<
Details on the roll-up cover are provided on
page 117.

Closing tailgate
Make sure that the closing path of the tailgate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<

Driving tips

> Press the button on the outside of the tailgate.
Closing is not canceled when you put the
vehicle into motion.<

Navigation

To interrupt opening:

> Press the button on the inside of the tailgate.

Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood or the luggage compartment lid/tailgate or rear window is
opened
> To movements in the vehicle: Interior
motion sensor, refer to page 38
> To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the
vehicle
> To interruptions in battery voltage
Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by
the alarm system:

Communications Entertainment

During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.<

To interrupt closing:

> with an acoustic alarm
> by switching on the hazard warning flashers
> by flashing the high beams

Arming and disarming alarm system
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

37
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

> Press the
button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.

Controls

button in the driver's foot-

Reference

> Press the
well.

Opening and closing

The luggage compartment lid/tailgate can also
be opened with the system armed with the
button on the remote control, refer to page 33.
When the luggage compartment lid/tailgate is
closed, it is locked and monitored again.

Switching off alarm

Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. in case of an attempted
wheel theft or towing.

Interior motion sensor

> Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
refer to page 30.

In order for the interior motion sensor to function properly, the windows and glass sunroof*
must be completely closed.

> Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

Indicator lamp displays

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This prevents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In stacking garages
> When transporting on car-carrying trains
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle

Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
> The indicator lamp under the inside rearview mirror flashes continuously: the system is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
doors, hood, luggage compartment lid/tailgate or rear window is/are not properly
closed. Even if you do not close the alerted
area, the system begins to monitor the
remaining areas, and the indicator lamp
flashes continuously after approx. 10 seconds. However, the interior motion sensor
is not activated.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
your vehicle has not been disturbed while
you were away.
> The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted into the
ignition lock, however for a maximum of
approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been
disturbed while you were away.

Press the
button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subsequently locked again.

Comfort access*
Comfort access enables you to access your
vehicle without having to hold the remote control in your hand. It is sufficient to carry the
remote control with you, e.g. in your jacket
pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the
related remote control in the immediate vicinity
or in the interior.
Comfort access supports the following functions:
> Unlocking/locking vehicle
> Comfort locking
> Opening luggage compartment lid/tailgate
separately

38
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started if the vehicle
detects that the remote control is located in
the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remote
control
You can control the functions mentioned previously with the comfort access or by pressing
the buttons on the remote control. Therefore,
please familiarize yourself with the information
on opening and closing beginning on page 28
beforehand.

This corresponds to pressing the
ton.

but-

Please make sure that the ignition and all
current consumers are switched off
before locking to save the battery.<

Comfort locking
Hold a finger or the back of the hand on the surface, arrow 2 or 3.
The windows and the glass sunroof* are
closed.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the
hand from the door handle stops the closing
process immediately.<

The special features when using comfort
access are described in the following.

Opening luggage compartment lid/
tailgate separately

Should a short delay occur when opening
or closing the windows or the glass sunroof, the system is checking whether a remote
control is located in the vehicle. Please repeat
opening or closing if necessary.<

Press the button on the luggage compartment
lid/tailgate. This corresponds to pressing the
button.

Releasing

At a glance

> For the remaining doors, touch the area
highlighted in the picture, arrow 3, with your
finger for approx. 1 second.

If a remote control accidentally left in the
luggage compartment/cargo area is
detected in the locked vehicle after closing the
luggage compartment lid/tailgate or the rear
window, the lid or rear window opens again. The
hazard warning flashers flash and a signal*
sounds.<

Controls

> The vehicle or the luggage compartment
lid/tailgate can only be locked if the vehicle
detects that the remote control you are carrying is outside the vehicle.

Driving tips

Functional requirement

> For the driver's door, touch the area highlighted in the picture, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second.

Navigation

> Starting engine

Locking

Communications Entertainment

> Sports Wagon: opening rear window separately

Completely grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This
corresponds to pressing the
button.
If a remote control is detected in the interior
after unlocking, the electric steering-wheel lock
unlocks, refer to page 58.

Switching on radio readiness
By briefly pressing the Start/Stop button, you
switch on the radio readiness, refer to page 58.

39
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Press the button on the rear window, refer to
page 34.

Mobility

Sports Wagon: opening rear window
separately

Opening and closing

When doing so, do not depress the brake
or clutch pedal, as otherwise the engine
will start immediately.<

1. Remove integrated key from remote control, refer to page 28.
2. Remove cover.

Starting engine
You can start the engine or switch on the switch
on ignition if a remote control is located in the
interior of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in
the ignition lock, refer to page 58.
If you take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle with the engine running, a
warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display. As long as no
remote control is detected in the vehicle, it is
only possible to restart the engine within
approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off.

Switching off engine with automatic
transmission
The engine can only be switched off in the
selector lever position P, refer to page 60.
To switch off the engine in the selector lever
position N, the remote control must be inserted
in the ignition lock.

Before driving into a car wash with
automatic transmission
1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Place selector lever in position N.

3. Lay in new battery with positive side facing
upward.
4. Press cover closed.
Return used battery to a recycling collection point or to your BMW center.<

Windows
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the windows and keep them in
your field of vision until they are shut.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the windows and injure themselves.<

Opening, closing

4. Switch off the engine.
The vehicle can roll.

Malfunction
The comfort access function may malfunction
due to local radio waves. Then open or close the
vehicle with the buttons on the remote control
or with a key. To start the engine following this,
insert the remote control in the ignition lock.

Replacing battery
The remote control for comfort access contains
a battery which must be replaced if necessary.

> Press switch to resistance point:
The window continues to open as long as
you keep the switch pressed.
> Press switch beyond resistance point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening movement.

40
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.

Safety switch

Separate switches for the rear windows are
located in the rear.

If the closing force rises beyond a predefined
threshold during closing, the system will immediately stop moving the window prior to lowering it slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the window's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
thin objects, and the window would continue
closing.
Pulling the switch beyond the resistance point
and holding it limits the response of the pinch
protection system. In this case, if the closing
force exceeds a defined threshold, the window
will only open a little.
If the switch is pulled past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds, the pinch protection system will be deactivated.
Do not install any accessories in the range of
movement of the windows, as otherwise the
pinch protection system will be impaired.<

Glass sunroof*, electric
The glass sunroof is ready for operation with
the ignition switched on, refer to page 58.
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the glass sunroof and keep it in
your field of vision until it is closed.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the roof and injure themselves.<

Driving tips

Always press the safety switch when children ride in the rear, otherwise
unchecked closing of the windows could lead to
injuries.<

Navigation

Pinch protection system

Mobility

You can still operate the windows with the
remote control removed or the ignition
switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as
neither of the front doors has been opened.

With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear
windows from being opened or closed via the
switches in the rear passenger area, by children, for example. The LED lights up when this
safety feature is activated.

Raising
Press switch.
> The closed glass sunroof is raised and the
sliding visor opens slightly.

41
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

After switching off ignition

Communications Entertainment

For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to page 39.

Controls

For information on using the convenience operation at the door lock or with the remote control,
refer to page 31 or 32.

Opening and closing

> The opened glass sunroof automatically
moves into the raised position. The sliding
visor remains completely open.
Do not use force to close the headliner
insert with the glass sunroof in its raised
position, otherwise the mechanism will be damaged.<

Opening, closing
> Press switch back to the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open
together for as long as you hold the switch
in this position.
> Press switch back past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly press the switch again
to stop the opening movement.
In a similar manner, the glass sunroof closes
when you slide the switch forward. The sliding
visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For information on using the convenience operation at the door lock or with the remote control,
refer to page 31 or 32.

Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
very thin objects, and the sunroof would continue closing.
Pressing the switch beyond the resistance
point and holding it there deactivates the pinch
protection system.<

Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power loss, the sunroof may only
respond to the lift command. The system must
be initialized. BMW recommends having this
work done by your BMW center.

Moving manually
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the glass sunroof manually:
1. Fold the cover panel down, if necessary
using a screwdriver from the onboard tool
kit, refer to page 211.

For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to page 39.

Automatic opening and closing
Press the switch past the resistance point.
The following movements are also automatic:
> When the sunroof is open, press the switch
in the lifting direction: the sunroof is raised
all the way.
> When the sunroof is raised, press the
switch in the opening direction: the sunroof
is opened all the way.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

2. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with the
onboard tool kit, refer to page 211, into the
opening provided. Move the glass sunroof
in the desired direction. The arrow below
indicates the rotation direction for closing.

Pinch protection system
If the glass sunroof encounters resistance when
closing from roughly the center of the roof
opening or when closing from the raised position, the closing action is interrupted and the
glass sunroof reopens a short way.

42
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the panorama glass sunroof and
keep it in your field of vision until it is closed.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the roof and injure themselves.<

Raising, opening, closing

At a glance

Press the switch past the resistance point.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Opening and closing sunroof and
sliding visor together
Press the switch beyond the resistance point
twice consecutively.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Comfort position
Each time the panorama glass sunroof is completely opened and then closed, it stops in the
comfort position. If desired, continue the
motion following this with the switch.
In the comfort position the wind noises in the
interior are reduced.

Controls

The panorama glass sunroof is ready for operation with the ignition switched on, refer to
page 58.

Automatic opening and closing

Driving tips

Sports Wagon:
Panorama glass sunroof

> slightly when the sunroof is tilted
With the sunroof closed or tilted, the sliding
visor can be opened and closed independently.
For information on using the convenience operation at the door lock or with the remote control,
refer to page 31 or 32.
For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to page 39.

Ventilation setting
Press the switch:
The sunroof is raised and the sliding visor is
opened slightly.

43
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Communications Entertainment

> together with the sunroof

Mobility

The sliding visor is opened:

Reference

Press the switch or slide it in the desired direction up to the resistance point.

If the panorama glass sunroof or sliding visor
encounter resistance when closing from
roughly one third of the sunroof opening or
when closing from the raised position, the closing action is interrupted and the panorama
glass sunroof and sliding visor reopen a little.

Navigation

Pinch protection system

Opening and closing

Moving manually
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the roof manually:
1. Fold back the cover, using the screwdriver
from the toolkit at the points indicated if
necessary, refer to page 211.

2. Remove the Allen key from the mounting
next to the toolkit and insert it in the opening provided. Move the sunroof in the
desired direction. The arrow below indicates the rotation direction for closing.

44
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

Adjustments

Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at
the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms
in the event of airbag deployment.
No one and nothing is to come between the airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly
and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument
panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the
front airbag is triggered.
Make sure that occupants do not rest their head
on the side or head airbag, otherwise injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.<
Even if you adhere to all the instructions, injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot
be fully excluded, depending on the circumstances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individuals. This effect is usually only temporary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 94.

Safety belts
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Your vehicle is provided with five seats, which
are all equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the
hips in the lap area and does not press on the
abdomen. The safety belt may not lie across the
neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid
or breakable objects or be pinched. Wear the
safety belt without twisting, snugly across the
lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Otherwise the belt can slip over the hips
in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the
abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents
the belt from fitting properly and pull the belt in
the upper body area periodically to readjust the
tension, in order to avoid a reduction in the
restraint of the safety belt.
Sports Wagon: if the middle safety belt in the
rear is used, the larger seatback half must be
locked, refer to page 117, otherwise the middle
safety belt has no restraining action.<
Safety belts, refer to page 49.

45
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Controls
Driving tips

Head restraints, refer to page 48.

Navigation

Airbags

Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident.<

Communications Entertainment

For additional information on transporting children safely, refer to page 54.

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.

Mobility

The ideal sitting position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the
interaction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seat position
plays an important role in an accident. To
ensure that the safety systems operate with
optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to
observe the instructions contained in the following section.

Head restraints

Reference

Sitting safely

Adjustments

Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Also on the passenger side, do not incline the
backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is
being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the
event of an accident of sliding under the safety
belt, eliminating the protection normally provided by the belt.<

Backrest

Adjusting comfort seat*
In this seat, you can also adjust:

Please observe the information on damage to
safety belts provided on page 50 and the information on the active front head restraints* on
page 49.

Seat adjustment
To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on
page 45.<

Backrest width

Shoulder support

Thigh support

Lumbar support*, see below

Shoulder support: the adjustable upper backrest also supports the back in the shoulder
region. This provides a relaxed driving position
and helps relieve stress on the shoulder muscles.
1

Longitudinal direction

Height

Angle

Adjusting lumbar support*

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
46
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory*

> Increase or decrease curvature: push
switch forward or back.

At a glance

The upper hips and spinal column receive supplementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.

Adjusting active backrest width*

You can store and request two different positions for the driver's seat and passenger seat*,
external rearview mirrors, and steering wheel.
The adjustment of the lumbar support is not
stored in the memory.

> "Comfort" program: one LED
> "Normal" program: two LEDs
> "Sport" program: three LEDs
To switch off: press button longer.

Easy entry/exit*
To facilitate entry and exit, the backrest width
temporarily opens all the way.

3. Press the
button:
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2:
The LED goes out.

Requesting
Do not request a position from the memory while the vehicle is moving. There is a
risk of accident from unexpected movement of
the seat or steering wheel.<

Convenience mode
1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on radio readiness.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The system immediately cancels the
adjustment procedure when you briefly
press one of the seat adjustment buttons or
one of the memory buttons.

47
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation

2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel positions.

Communications Entertainment

Press program button once:

1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer
to page 58.

Mobility

The adaptation of the backrest width and the
speed of the adjustment vary depending on the
program. You can select from among three programs from comfort to sport.

Storing

Reference

First set a comfortable backrest width, see
above. Based on the backrest width set, the lateral support is automatically adapted to the current driving situation.

Driving tips

Controls

> Shift curvature up or down: push switch up
or down.

Adjustments

Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch the ignition on or off.

7. Select "After unlocking" or "After door
opened".

2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and maintain pressure until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the
button was pressed inadvertently:
press the button again; the LED goes out.

Activating with remote control
The last positions of the driver's seat, the external rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are
stored for the remote key currently in use.
You can choose when the position is requested:
> Request when unlocking vehicle
> Request when opening driver's door
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.

8. Press the controller.
To cancel the request:
Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.
When using this feature, always make
sure that the footwell behind the driver's
seat is empty and unobstructed. Failure to do
so could cause injury to persons or damage to
objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<

2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.

Head restraints

4. Select "Door locks" and press the controller.

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident.<

Front seats: height adjustment

5. Select "Central locking" and press the controller.
6. Select "Last seat pos." and press the controller.

You can adjust the height of the head restraints
electrically.

Front seats: angle adjustment
Swivel the head restraint.
48
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on
page 45.<

Driving tips

Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.

At a glance

Adjusting side extensions in comfort
seat

Safety belts

Controls

With the comfort seat, use the shoulder support
to set the distance to the back of the head.

You can fold the side extensions on the head
restraint forward for increased lateral support in
the resting position.

Front head restraints, active*

Fastening

Rear seats: height adjustment

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.

Safety belt memory for driver's seat
and passenger seat*
The indicator lamp lights up and a signal sounds. A message also appears on
the Control Display. Please check
whether the safety belt is correctly positioned.

> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint downward.

The safety belt memory is operative at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the passenger
seat.

49
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

Do not use seat or head restraint covers
and do not hand objects, e.g. clothes
hangers, on the head restraints or attach any
accessories to the seat or head restraint. Otherwise the protective function of the active head
restraints will be impaired and personal safety
endangered.<

Reference

In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient
severity, the active head restraint reduces the
distance to the head.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

The comfort seats are equipped with an active
head restraint.

Adjustments

Releasing

Temperature distribution

1. Grasp the belt firmly.

The heat output can be distributed variously in
the seat cushion and the backrest.

2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 46.
The two rear safety belt buckles integrated into
the rear seat are for passengers sitting on the
left and right. The belt buckle embossed with
the word CENTER is intended exclusively for
use by passengers riding in the center position.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".
3. Select "Seat heater distribution" and press
the controller.
4. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Driver" or "Passenger".

Damage to safety belts
In the event of loads caused by accidents
or other damage: replace the belt system
including the safety belt tensioner and any child
restraint systems, and have the belt anchor
points checked. Only have this work carried out
at a BMW center or at a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Otherwise correct operation of this safety equipment is not
guaranteed.<

Heated seats*

5. Turn the controller. The adjustment is
applied; the field can be changed.

Rear

Front

Operation as for front seat heating; two temperature settings.
The temperature setting progresses one step
through its control sequence each time you
press the button. The maximum temperature is
supplied when three LEDs are lit.
To switch off: press the button longer.

50
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

The mirror on the passenger's side is
more curved than the driver's mirror.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance of
following traffic based on what you see in the
mirrors, otherwise there is an increased accident risk.<

Active seat*

Adjustments

Switching to the other mirror or to the automatic parking function

Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory on page 47.

Manual adjustment
You can also adjust the mirrors manually by
pressing against the outer edges of their mirror
glass.

Folding mirrors in and out
The seat cushion is actively varied by alternately raising and lowering the right and left half
of the seat cushion. This reduces muscular tension and fatigue to help prevent lower back
pain.
Press the button to switch on; the LED lights
up.
If you switch off the active seat, it can take up
to 1 minute before the two halves of the seat
cushion have returned to their initial position.

To prevent the exterior mirrors on this
vehicle from being damaged, always fold
them in by hand before entering an automatic
car wash.<

Automatic heating
Below a certain outdoor temperature, both
exterior mirrors are automatically heated when
the motor is running or the ignition is switched
on.

51
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

The highest position with three LEDs is
used for rapid cooling, e.g. when the vehicle has gotten heated up. After a short time, the
system is automatically switched down one
position in order to prevent excessive cooling.<

Communications Entertainment

To switch off: press the button longer.

Navigation

Driving tips

The system progresses one step through the
control sequence each time you press the button.

At a glance

Exterior mirrors

Controls

Mirrors

Reference

Active seat ventilation*

Adjustments

Tilting down passenger-side exterior
mirror – automatic parking function*

Steering wheel
Adjustments

Activating
1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror
position, arrow 1.

2. Engage reverse gear or selector lever position R.
The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat
on the passenger's side. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle – such as a curb – when parking, etc.

Deactivating
Slide switch into the passenger side mirror
position, arrow 2.

Interior rearview mirror

Do not adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is moving. There is a risk of accident as the result of unexpected movement.<

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four
directions.
Storing steering wheel positions, refer to Seat,
mirror and steering wheel memory on page 47.

Electric steering wheel lock
The steering wheel locks or unlocks automatically when the remote control is removed or
inserted, refer to page 58.

Easy entry/exit*
To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel
temporarily moves into the uppermost position.

Steering wheel heater*

To reduce the dazzle effect of following vehicles at night, turn the knob.
Automatically dimming* mirrors, refer to
page 125.

Press the button with the ignition switched on.
When the steering wheel heater is operating,
the LED in the button lights up.

52
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

> "Mute on / off"
Mutes the audio sources
> "Monitor on / off"
Switches the Control Display on/off

At a glance

Programmable buttons* on steering
wheel

You can program the buttons individually.

> "Next entertainment source"
Changes audio source

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

> "Night Vision on / off"
Switches BMW Night Vision* on/off

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.

5. Select the desired function and press the
controller.

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

6. Select the button if necessary and press the
controller.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Steering wheel buttons" is
selected and press the controller.

You can operate the selected function using the
corresponding button.

Operating function
Press the corresponding button on the steering
wheel.

> "Air recirculation on / off"
Permanently shutting off outside air,
refer to AUC Automatic recirculated air
control on page 108

> To switch voice instructions on/off:
Hold the button down.
> To repeat the last voice instruction:
Press the button.

53
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

> "Navigation voice instructions"
Voice instructions for the navigation
system*

If you have programmed "Navigation voice
instructions" for one of the buttons:

Reference

A list of different functions appears:

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

Driving tips

> "HDC on / off"
Switches HDC Hill Descent Control* on/
off

Controls

> "Telephone list"*
Display/hide phone book or last list of
stored phone numbers

Transporting children safely

Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening
the doors.<

Children always in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is on the back seat.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may only
be transported in the rear in child restraint systems which correspond to the age, weight and
height of the child. Otherwise there is an
increased danger of injury in an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
size and weight.
With the exception of the driver's seat, all seats
in your BMW comply with the recommendations of the standard SAE J1819 for the safe
securing of child restraint systems in motor
vehicles.

Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbag on the passenger
side must be deactivated. Otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury for the child if the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
system. Your BMW center will be glad to advise
you.<

Installing child restraint
systems
Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions for selection,
installation and use of the child restraint systems. Otherwise the degree of protection may
be reduced.<

Backrest width* on front passenger
seat
Before mounting a child restraint system
on the front passenger seat, the backrest
width adjustment must be open completely.
After mounting the child's seat, no memory
position may be called up and the active backrest width adjustment must be deactivated,
otherwise the stability of the child's seat on the
front passenger seat is limited.<
1. After unlocking the vehicle, place on the
front passenger seat and close the door to
call up the memory position.
2. Completely open the backrest width adjustment, refer to page 46.
3. Deactivate active backrest width adjustment, refer to page 47.
4. Install child's seat.

Child seat security

For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 95.

All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be locked against pulling
out to secure child restraint systems.

54
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Only use the teather-strap mounting
points to secure child restraint systems,
as otherwise the mounting points could be
damaged.<

2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull taut against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.

At a glance

Sports Wagon

1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.

Controls

Locking safety belt

Unlocking safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in completely.

Child restraint system with tether strap

There are three additional mounting points for
child restraint systems with a tether strap, refer
to arrows. Fold the corresponding mounting
point upward before using.

Placement of tether strap
Outer seats:
1. Pull the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the tether strap through the bracket
of the head restraint.
3. Slide the head restraint into the bottom
position.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Sedan

Three are three additional mounting points for
child restraint systems with a tether strap, refer
to arrows, under covers in the cargo area floor.
Before using, remove the corresponding cover
with a screwdriver.

Driving tips

2. Remove the child restraint system.

1. Fold the center armrest somewhat toward
the front.

55
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Center seat:

Mobility

4. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting
point.

Transporting children safely

2. Guide the tether strap through the opening.

with the arrows. They are not visible from the
outside.
Before attaching the LATCH child's seat, pull
the belt away from the region of the childrestraint fixing system.

Sedan: rear seats with through-loading
system*

3. Fold back the center armrest.
4. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting
point.
On the Sports Wagon, also guide the tether
strap between the backrest and the roll-up
cover on all rear seats.
The anchorage points for the LATCH childrestraint fixing system are located behind the
indicated protective caps. Before attaching the
child's seat, remove the protective caps and
pull the belt out of the area of the child-restraint
fixing system.

Sports Wagon: rear seats
LATCH child-restraint fixing system
LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHildren.
To attach a LATCH child's seat, follow the
operating and safety instructions of the
child's seat manufacturer.<

Sedan: rear seats

The mountings for mounting the LATCH childrestraint fixing system are located behind the
indicated protective caps and are covered again
after the child's seat is removed.
Before attaching the LATCH child's seat, pull
the belt away from the region of the childrestraint fixing system.

The mountings for the LATCH child's seat fixing system are located at the points marked
56
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

On trips

Controls

If the vehicle is equipped with rear side
airbags, make sure that children do not
lean out of the child's seat towards the door
panels. Otherwise injuries can be caused if the
side airbags are triggered.<

Driving tips

Child-safety locks for rear doors

Navigation

Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors:
the door can now be opened from the outside
only.

Safety switch for power windows

57
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Always press the safety switch for the power
windows, refer to page 41, when children are
riding in the rear of the vehicle.

Driving

Driving
Ignition lock

Start/Stop button

Insert the remote control as far as possible into
the ignition lock.

Briefly pressing the Start/Stop button several
times switches the radio readiness or the ignition on and off.

> Radio readiness switches on.
Some current consumers are ready for
operation.
> The electric steering-wheel lock audibly
unlocks.
Before moving the vehicle, insert the
remote control into the ignition lock;
otherwise, the electric steering-wheel lock will
not be unlocked and the vehicle cannot be
steered.<

Removing remote control from ignition
lock

Briefly pressing the Start/Stop button
with the brake or clutch pedal depressed
starts the engine.<

Radio readiness
Some current consumers are ready for operation. The time and outside temperature are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is automatically switched off:
> when the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock

Briefly press in the remote control; it is pushed
out somewhat.

> with comfort access* by touching the sensitive surface on the door handle, refer to
Locking on page 39

> The ignition is switched off if it was still
switched on.

Ignition on

> The electric steering-wheel lock audibly
locks.

Automatic transmission
The remote control can only be removed when
the selector lever position P is selected: interlock.

All current consumers are ready for operation.
The odometer and the trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 74.
Please switch off the ignition and the current consumers which are not required
when the engine is not running to save the battery.<

Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
58
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission*
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position N and make
sure that this position is also indicated in
instrument cluster.
3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.
The system responds by automatically engaging the starter for a certain period and automatically disengaging it as soon as the engine
starts.
If the engine fails to start, depress the
brake pedal and press the selector lever
to the right then engage the position N. Watch
the display in the instrument cluster while doing
so.<

Special starting conditions
Do not press either the brake or the clutch
pedal as long as you do not want to start
the engine. The engine starts immediately
when you briefly press the Start/Stop button
and press the brake pedal with an automatic
transmission* or the clutch pedal with a manual
transmission.<

Manual transmission
1. Apply the handbrake.
2. Depress the clutch pedal and select the
idling position.
3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.

Depress the accelerator pedal half way when
starting the engine in the following situations:
> The engine fails to start on the first attempt,
e.g. if it is very hot or cold.
> The engine is started at very low temperatures, below approx. +5 7/–15 6, at high
altitudes, over approx. 3,300 ft/1,000 m.
Avoid frequent starting in quick succession or repeated starting attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<

The system responds by automatically engaging the starter for a certain period and automatically disengaging it as soon as the engine
starts.
59
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance
Controls

The system responds by automatically engaging the starter for a certain period and automatically disengaging it as soon as the engine
starts.

Driving tips

3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.

Navigation

Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, begin to drive immediately at a moderate engine speed.

2. Place selector lever in position P or N.

Communications Entertainment

When starting the engine, do not press the
accelerator pedal.

1. Depress brake pedal.

Mobility

Do not run the engine in closed rooms,
otherwise the inhaling of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle represents a
potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running, set the selector lever to the idling or the
P position and set the handbrake, otherwise the
vehicle can begin to roll.<

Automatic transmission*

Reference

Starting engine

Driving

Switching off engine
Do not remove the remote control from
the ignition lock while the vehicle is rolling, otherwise the steering wheel lock would
engage while steering.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
remote control with you.
When parking on a downhill incline, apply the
handbrake, as otherwise the vehicle could roll
away.<

Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.

Releasing

Manual transmission
1. Briefly press the Start/Stop button with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Apply the handbrake.

SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission*
1. Apply the handbrake.
2. Engage a driving position.
3. Briefly press the Start/Stop button.
If the position N is engaged when the
engine is switched off, this is pointed out
visually and acoustically.

Automatic transmission*
1. Select the selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Briefly press the Start/Stop button.

Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
If exceptional circumstances should
make it necessary to engage the handbrake while the vehicle is in motion, do not pull it
too strongly. In doing so, continuously press the
button of the handbrake lever. Otherwise
excessive pressure can lead to the rear wheels
locking up and loss of traction – fishtailing – at
the rear axle.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided braking action, occasionally apply the handbrake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the handbrake is applied.<

Manual transmission

Handbrake
The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes
the rear wheels.

Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp lights up, and a signal also sounds when starting off. The
handbrake is applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.

While shifting in the 5th/6th gear lane,
press the gearshift lever toward the right,
otherwise accidental shifting into the 3rd or 4th
gear could result in engine damage.<

60
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

The SMG is operated with the selector lever
and two shift paddles on the steering wheel.
It offers you the following functions:
> Optional manual or automatic operation:
Sequential mode or Drive mode
> You have a choice of two driving programs:
Normal or Sport, refer to Dynamic Driving
Control page 62
> Automatic downshifting and prevention of
incorrect shifting even in Sequential operation

R N 1 to 6
The currently engaged gear is displayed, preceded by a D in Drive mode.
It is only possible to recognize whether
the desired selector lever position is
engaged with this display.<

> Acceleration assistant, refer to page 63.

Shiftlock

Selector lever positions

Press the brake pedal before shifting out of N;
the shift command will not be executed unless
the brake is applied.

R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

Sequential mode
After every engine start, as soon as the selector
lever is pushed to the right and the brake pedal
is pressed, the Sequential mode is activated.
> R: Reverse gear
> N: Neutral
> One-touch functions for Sequential mode:
+: manual upshifting
–: manual downshifting
> D: activate/deactivate the Drive mode

You can shift up and down using the shifting
paddles or the selector lever. You do not need
to remove your foot from the accelerator to do
so.
It is also possible to start off in second gear, e.g.
in slippery conditions.

61
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance
Navigation

Driving tips

The SMG Sequential Manual Transmission is
an automated manual transmission in which an
electrohydraulic system handles the clutching
and gear changes.

Controls

Gear display

The concept

Communications Entertainment

SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission*

Mobility

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
When pressing the gearshift lever to the left,
overcome some resistance.

The transmission automatically shifts
into N if the driver's door is opened with
the engine running and neither the pedals, the
shift paddles nor the selector lever are operated.
This is signaled by an acoustic signal and the
flashing display N in the instrument cluster; a
message appears on the Control Display.<

Reference

Reverse gear

Driving

In the following situations, SMG thinks for you:

Using shift paddles on steering wheel

> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, a downshift that would cause the
engine to overrev will not be executed by
the system.
> When the vehicle is stationary, the transmission automatically downshifts into first
gear.
> Shortly before dropping below a geardependent minimum speed, the transmission downshifts automatically even without
your intervention.

> To upshift, pull one of the shift paddles.

D Drive mode

The Dynamic Driving Control makes it possible
for your BMW to react in an even more performance-oriented manner at the push of a button:

In the Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted
automatically.
Shifting from Sequential mode to Drive mode:
press selector lever to the right toward D.
Kick-down: for rapid acceleration, e.g. when
passing, press the accelerator pedal as far
down as it will go. You achieve maximum acceleration.
To switch back into the Sequential mode: press
selector lever to the right again toward D or shift
using the shifting paddles or the selector lever.
Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold
the vehicle on a hill by pressing the accelerator, but apply the handbrake instead. Otherwise overheating can occur in the transmission
region.<

> To downshift, press.

Dynamic Driving Control

> The engine responds more spontaneously
to accelerator pedal movements.
> Gearshifts are faster.
> The engine speed range is used optimally in
the Drive mode.
> Cruise control*:
The stored speed is reached more quickly
when it is requested.

Activating system

Gear changes
Using selector lever
> To upshift, pull the selector lever back.
> To downshift, push the selector lever forward.

Press the SPORT button.
The LED in the button lights up and SPORT is
displayed in the instrument cluster.

Deactivating system
Press the SPORT button again.
The LED in the button and SPORT in the instrument cluster go out.

62
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

> Only move the selector lever from position P when the engine is running: interlock.

Driving tips

To maintain the vehicle stability, reactivate DSC afterward.<

Automatic transmission with
Steptronic*
In addition to fully automatic operation, you can
also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to
page 64.

Selector lever positions

A lock prevents accidentally shifting into the
selector lever positions R and P. To cancel the
lock, press the button on the front of the selector lever, refer to arrow.

P R N D M/S + –

P Park

Displays in instrument cluster

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
The rear wheels are locked.

R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral
Can, for example, be engaged in automatic car
washes. The vehicle can roll.

D Drive, automatic position
P R N D DS M1 to M6
The selector lever position is indicated, and in
the manual mode the gear currently engaged.

Position for normal vehicle operation. All forward gears are available.
Under normal operating conditions, the fuel
consumption is lowest when driving in position D.

63
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation

3. Quickly press accelerator pedal all the way
down: kick-down. The ideal starting-off
engine speed is set.

Communications Entertainment

2. Deactivate DSC, refer to page 87.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
maintain pressure on the brake pedal until
you are ready to start.<

Mobility

1. Activate the Dynamic Driving Control.

> With the vehicle stopped, press the brake
before shifting out of P or N, otherwise the
selector lever is blocked: shiftlock.

Reference

Do not use the acceleration assistant too
often, otherwise components will wear
prematurely.<

At a glance

Changing selector lever positions

The acceleration assistant enables optimized
vehicle acceleration at racing car level on road
surfaces with good adhesion when starting off.

Controls

Acceleration assistant

Driving

Kick-down

1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.

The kick-down mode provides maximum acceleration: press the accelerator pedal beyond the
full-throttle resistance point.

2. Pull the sleeve over the selector lever.

Sport program and
manual operation M/S

3. Press the lever at the point marked in red
with the screwdriver from the onboard toolkit, refer to page 211, and move the selector
lever into the desired position.
Move selector lever from position D toward the
left into the M/S shifting slot:
The sport program is activated and DS is displayed in the instrument cluster. This position is
recommended for a performance-oriented driving style.

Turn signals/
headlamp flasher

When the selector lever is pressed forward or
back, the manual mode is activated and the
Steptronic shifts the gear. The instrument cluster shows M1 through M6.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system. The
selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the current gear.

High beams

Headlamp flasher

Turn signals

To use the automatic function again, move the
selector lever to the right into position D.

Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

Deactivating selector lever interlock
If the selector lever is blocked in the position P
even though the button on the selector lever is
pressed, the selector lever interlock can be
deactivated:

To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
needs to be replaced.<

Signaling briefly
Press lever to resistance point and hold for as
long as you wish to signal.

64
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.

Normal wiper speed

1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.

Press once.
The system reverts to operation in the intermittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system reverts to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.

Rain sensor
The wiper operation is controlled automatically
as a function of the rain intensity. The rain sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front
of the interior rearview mirror.
5. Select "Triple turn signal activation" and
press the controller.
Triple turn signaling is activated.

Activating rain sensor

Wiper system

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the button lights up.

Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level

At a glance

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Controls

You can activate or deactivate this function.

Driving tips

Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.

Navigation

Switching on wipers

Press the lever to the resistance point; the turn
signal flashes three times.

Communications Entertainment

Triple turn signal activation

Switching off wipers or brief wipe

Deactivating rain sensor

Activating/deactivating rain sensor

Cleaning windshield, headlamps and
BMW Night Vision camera*

Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes
out.

Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level

Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash. Failure to
do so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.<

65
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Switching on wipers
Mobility

Turn the knurled wheel 5.
1

Driving

Cleaning windshield, headlamps* and
BMW Night Vision camera*
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
The system sprays washer fluid against the
windshield and activates the wipers for a brief
period.
With the vehicle lighting switched on, the headlamps and the BMW Night Vision camera are
also cleaned simultaneously at suitable intervals.

Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Always keep it well away from sparks and
open flames, and store it in tightly closed containers well out of the reach of children. Always
observe the instructions for use provided on the
containers.<

Washer fluid reservoir

Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do so, your vision could be
obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid
antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use
washing mechanisms when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage
the washer pump.<

Windshield washer nozzles
Both windshield washer nozzles are automatically heated with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

Sports Wagon:
Rear window wiper

All washer jets are supplied from one reservoir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recommendations.
In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix
the washer fluid before filling.<

Capacity
Sedan:
approx. 3.2 US quarts/3 liters, with headlamp
washer system* approx. 5.3 US quarts/5 liters.
Sports Wagon: approx. 5.3 US quarts/5 liters.

Cruise control*
1

Intermittent mode. When reverse gear is
engaged, continuous operation is switched
on automatically
Cleaning the rear window

Do not use washing mechanisms when
the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage the washer pump.<

The concept
The cruise control is available for use at speeds
of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h and higher. The
vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you
set using the lever mounted on the steering column.
Do not use the cruise control under driving conditions that do not permit a constant speed, e.g. when driving on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions
such as snow, rain, ice, and loose road surface.

66
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

One lever for all functions

Interrupting cruise control
Press the lever up or down, arrow 3.
In addition, cruise control is automatically deactivated:

At a glance

Otherwise you could loose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.<

> When the clutch pedal is depressed or the
automatic transmission/SMG is shifted into
the N position
> When the DSC comes on

Controls

> When the brakes are applied

Interrupting cruise control

Resuming stored speed

Deactivating system
When the ignition is switched off, the system is
deactivated and the stored speed is deleted.

Displays in instrument cluster

Maintaining speed, storing speed,
and accelerating
Press lever to resistance point, arrow 1:
The speed currently being driven is maintained
and stored. The display 1 in the speedometer,
see below, indicates this regulated speed.
Every time you press the lever, the vehicle's
speed increases by roughly 1 mph/1 km/h.
Press lever to resistance point for a longer time:
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system maintains
and stores your current speed as soon as you
release the lever.
Press the lever beyond the resistance point:
increase speed by 5 mph/10 km/h.
If, on a downhill grade, the engine's braking
effect is not sufficient, the controlled speed can
be exceeded. Speed can drop on uphill grades if
the engine output is insufficient.

Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating
Pull the lever, arrow 2:
Functions are the same as 1, only the vehicle
speed is reduced.

Stored desired speed

Selected desired speed appears briefly

Active cruise control*
The concept
With active cruise control, you can select a
desired speed which is not only automatically
maintained when driving on open roadways, but
also varied to maintain a selected distance setting as slower traffic is encountered.
Active cruise control is a technological advance
over the familiar cruise control and is a welcome
relief from the constant adjustment of speed
that can accompany driving in traffic on freeways or other high-speed thoroughfares.
67

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation

Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating

Communications Entertainment

Mobility

Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
accelerating

Reference

Press button 4:
The stored speed is resumed and maintained.

Driving tips

Resuming stored speed

Driving

Especially on longer trips, the system can
reduce fatigue and tension, while increasing
your enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely
and responsibly.
In addition to holding a steady cruising speed,
if you encounter slower vehicles ahead, active
cruise control will, within the scope of given
possibilities, adjust your vehicle's speed automatically so that you can flow with the traffic
without having to make constant adjustments.
If, for example, while cruising at the selected
speed, you begin to approach a slower vehicle
ahead of you in the same lane, the system will
reduce your vehicle's speed to the same as that
of the vehicle ahead to maintain your selected
distance setting between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. You can vary the distance, which
is additionally speed-dependent. Based on
your selected distance setting, the system
automatically decreases the throttle setting and
lightly applies the brakes if necessary. The vehicle brake lamps will automatically illuminate to
signal a following driver to take action. In addition, it may be necessary for the vehicle or the
driver to downshift, depending on the kind of
transmission your vehicle is equipped with, to
maintain the distance setting selected. If the
vehicle ahead speeds up or when the lane
ahead becomes clear, your vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have selected by increasing the throttle setting and shifting gears automatically or by the driver as needed. Your
selected speed will be held when driving downhill, too.
Active cruise control is not and must not
be used as a collision avoidance/warning
system.<
Since this active cruise control system is
a new technology and operates differently from conventional cruise control systems
which you may be accustomed to, you are
strongly urged to read all of the pages relating
to this system before use. Pay special attention
to the information contained in the Things to
know about active cruise control section beginning on page 71.<

Professional navigation system*
If a navigation DVD is in the drive, refer to
page 132, the system adjusts the accelerating
and braking behavior of the vehicle to the road
you are driving on.
To ensure that the system is informed of
the current course of the road, always use
the latest navigation DVD if possible.<
When the vehicle position is unknown, e.g.
when you leave the map area, this influence of
the navigation system is not available.

Brake pedal feel
> When the system brakes and you also
depress the brake pedal, a somewhat different braking feeling results.
> Any noises produced during automatic
braking are normal.

Manual transmission
You can shift with the cruise control activated.
Shifting information is provided or the system
deactivates itself if you drive at very high or very
low engine speeds for a longer period.

SMG
In the Sequential mode, shifting information is
provided or the system deactivates itself if you
drive at very high engine speeds for a longer
period.
In the Drive mode the SMG acts similarly to an
automatic transmission in the D position.

Operating active cruise control

Store and increase desired speed

Store and decrease desired speed

68
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Deactivate system, refer to page 70

Decreasing in steps

Resume stored desired speed and distance, refer to page 70

Select distance to vehicle driving ahead,
refer to page 69

Repeatedly pull the lever up to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired
speed is displayed.

The speed then displayed is stored and
reached on a clear road.

The speed currently being driven is stored and
maintained. It is indicated on the speedometer
and briefly in the instrument cluster.

Selecting desired speed
Adjust your desired speed to the traffic
conditions and remain ready to brake at
all times, otherwise accidents can occur.<

> Rotary switch downward:
Increase distance.

The desired speed can drop on uphill grades if
the engine output is insufficient.

> Rotary switch upward:
Decrease distance.

Increasing in steps

The selected distance is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Briefly press the lever repeatedly up to the
resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the
desired speed is displayed.
> Each time the lever is briefly pressed up to
the resistance point, the desired speed
increases by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

Controls
Navigation

Select distance

Driving tips

> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
decreased by a maximum of 5 mph or
10 km/h until the minimum speed of
20 mph or 30 km/h is reached.

Distance 1

Communications Entertainment

Briefly press lever, arrow 1, or briefly pull lever,
arrow 2, at a driving speed of more than approx.
20 mph or 30 km/h.

> Each time the lever is pulled up to the resistance point, the desired speed decreases
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

Distance 2

Mobility

> Each time the lever is briefly pressed
beyond the resistance point, the desired
speed is increased by a maximum of 5 mph
or 10 km/h until the maximum speed of
110 mph or 180 km/h is reached.
The speed then displayed is stored and
reached on a clear road.

69
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Maintaining current speed

At a glance

Driving

Distance 3
This distance is set when the system is used for the first time after
starting the engine.
Distance 4

Use good judgment to select the appropriate following distance given road conditions, traffic, applicable laws and driving recommendations for a safe following distance.<

intervention of the driver is required, otherwise
accidents can occur.<

Resume stored desired speed and
distance
Press button 4.
The displays appear in the instrument cluster.
When you switch off the ignition, the stored
desired speed is deleted.

Displays in instrument cluster

Deactivate system

Stored desired speed

Lights up yellow: vehicle driving ahead is
detected
Flashes red, a signal sounds: the system
cannot establish the distance, apply the
brakes yourself

Press the lever up or down. The displays in the
instrument cluster disappear.
You also deactivate the system when you
brake, shift very slowly or into neutral, or
engage the selector lever position N. In addition, the system is deactivated automatically:

Flashes yellow: driving stability control systems intervene, the active cruise control is
deactivated

> When you activate DTC Dynamic Traction
Control

Selected distance to vehicle driving ahead:
lights up as soon as the system is activated

> When you deactivate DSC Dynamic Stability Control

Selected desired speed appears briefly

> When the system does not recognize any
objects for a longer time, e.g. on infrequently traveled roads without a shoulder or
guard rails, or if the radar sensor is covered
with dirt, refer to page 71

If the display ACC --- mph/km/h briefly
appears in the instrument cluster, it might
be that conditions necessary for operation are
not currently being met. To call up Check Control messages, refer to page 79.<

> When the speed is reduced to below
20 mph/30 km/h due to a traffic situation
The system deactivates automatically
when the speed is set to below 20 mph/
30 km/h. A signal sounds and a message
appears on the Control Display. The active

70
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

The display 2 flashes red and a signal sounds.
The system requests that you
intervene by braking or with an
evasive maneuver. The active
cruise control cannot automatically restore the
distance to the vehicle driving ahead.
However, this display cannot relieve the driver
of the responsibility for adjusting the desired
speed and driving style to the traffic conditions.
The display 2 flashes yellow.
Automatic intervention by ABS or
DSC. The active cruise control
intervenes by braking until you
take over actively.

Heavy rain, dirt, snow or ice can restrict the
detection of vehicles driving ahead. If necessary, clean the front radar sensor under the
bumper. Exercise particular care when removing snow and ice.
If the sensor is not aligned properly, the active
cruise control cannot be activated.

Controls

Radar sensor

Driving tips

Warning lamps

Always remember that the range and ability of the system does have physical limitations. It will not apply the brakes or decelerate
your vehicle when there is a slow-moving vehicle, stopped vehicle or stationary object ahead
of you, as for example, at a traffic light or a
parked vehicle. Also, the system does not react
to oncoming traffic, pedestrians or other types
of potential traffic such as a rider on horseback.
It is also possible that the system may not
detect smaller moving objects such as motorcycles or bicycles. Be especially alert when
encountering any of these situations as the
71

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

speed and distance setting within applicable
legal limits. Always be ready to take action or
apply the brakes if necessary, especially when
the system is actively following a vehicle in front
of you.<

Reference

As with conventional cruise control systems, active cruise control in no way
diminishes or substitutes for the driver's own
personal responsibility, alertness and awareness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise
controlling the vehicle. The driver should
decide when to use the system on the basis of
road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions.
Active cruise control is intended for use on
highway-type roadways where traffic is moving
relatively smoothly. Do not use this system in
city driving; heavy traffic such as during rush
hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or
roads with sharp curves such as highway offramps; during inclement weather such as snow,
strong rain or fog; or when entering interchanges, service/parking areas or toll booths.
It is also important to regulate your vehicle's

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Things to know about active cruise control

Driving

system will neither automatically brake, nor provide a warning to you. Also, be aware that every
decrease in the distance setting allows your
vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front of
you and requires a heightened amount of alertness.<
If while your vehicle is actively following a vehicle in front of you and the vehicle ahead speeds
up or the lane ahead becomes clear, then your
vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have
selected. Be aware that changing to a clear,
unobstructed lane will also result in your vehicle
accelerating.
Be certain to deactivate the system when
you pull into an exit lane for a highway offramp.<
Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner
on a highway may cause a delay in the system's
reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause
the system to react to a vehicle actually in the
lane next to you. Always be ready to take action
or apply the brakes if necessary.
Active cruise control can only decelerate the
vehicle to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. If the system reduces vehicle speed below 20 mph/
30 km/h or if DSC/ABS is engaged while driving,
the system will automatically deactivate.
Remember, the system cannot stop your
vehicle. In addition, the system is deactivated whenever the driver applies the vehicle
brakes, shifts the transmission to neutral/N, or
deactivates DSC. After any deactivation, the
system will no longer automatically activate the
vehicle brakes, which means the driver must
intervene and resume manual braking. You
should then reactivate the system only when
you are fully aware of the prior speed and distance settings.<
Active cruise control may brake when you
reduce the stored desired speed; however, the
driver must constantly monitor traffic and intervene if necessary.
When you switch off the engine or ignition,
active cruise control is fully switched off, too,
and any settings you have selected are canceled.

Swerving vehicles

When a vehicle moves from an adjacent lane
into your lane, active cruise control will not recognize this vehicle until it is fully in your lane
ahead of your vehicle.

Behavior in curves

Because of the limited range of the system, it is
possible that in curves or on the peaks and valleys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be recognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to
the driver to select a speed that is prudent in
view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.

In approaching a curve, it is possible that active
cruise control would react briefly to a vehicle in
the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can
sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not
accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either

72
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

case, you can choose to overcome the deceleration by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.

Driver interventions

Driving tips

Controls

Anytime the driver presses down on the
accelerator pedal, any automatic braking
action by the system is interrupted until the
pedal is fully released. After doing this, release
the accelerator and the system again controls
your cruising speed and distance setting. While
driving with the system activated, resting your
foot on the accelerator pedal will cause the system not to brake even if necessary. Be certain
that floor mats or other objects on the vehicle
floor do not interfere with movement of the
accelerator pedal.<

73
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

While active cruise control is capable of
braking your vehicle automatically when
you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is
important to be aware that the ability of the system to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g.
when you reduce your desired speed sharply.
The system cannot stop your vehicle. It uses
only a portion of braking system capacity and
does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle
braking system. Therefore, the system cannot
decrease your speed due to large differences in
speed between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Example: when you approach a vehicle
traveling at a much lower speed than your own
speed, such as approaching a toll booth or
when a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you
at close range.<

Everything under control

Everything under control
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock

Time, outside temperature and data

Odometer and trip odometer

Press button:

Tachometer

> with ignition switched on, trip odometer
is reset
> briefly display the time, outside temperature and odometer with the ignition
switched off

Time and date setting, refer to page 82.

The white-striped advance warning field,
arrow 1, changes depending on the engine
temperature. With increasing engine temperature the advance warning field becomes correspondingly smaller. Avoid allowing the engine
speed to rise as far as the orange warning sector whenever possible.

You can set the unit of measure 7 or 6 on the
Control Display, refer to Units of measure on
page 84.

Be sure to avoid engine speeds in the red warning field, arrow 2. In this range, the fuel supply is
interrupted to protect the engine.

From radio readiness the outside temperature
and the time are displayed.
Date retrieval:
Press CHECK button on turn signal lever, refer
to page 80.

Outside temperature warning
If the display drops to +377/+3 6, a signal
sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display. There is
an increased danger of ice.
Even at temperatures above +377/
+36 ice can form. Therefore, drive carefully, e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the
shade, otherwise there is an increased accident
risk.<

Coolant temperature
Should the coolant, and with it the engine
become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In
addition, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Checking coolant level, refer to page 207.

74
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Computer

Displays the current fuel consumption. This
allows you to see whether your current driving
style is conducive to fuel economy with minimum exhaust emissions.

Fuel gauge

To display the information, press the BC button
in the turn signal lever from radio readiness.
The following information is displayed in the
specified order:
> Cruising range

Driving tips

Controls

Displays in instrument cluster

At a glance

Energy Control

Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is projected
based on the driving style over the last 20 miles/
30 km.

Reserve
After the reserve quantity has been reached, a
message briefly appears on the Control Display;
the remaining range is shown in the computer.
Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the
message remains on the Control Display.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<

Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
To reset average speed: press BC button on
turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
You can use the Control Display to view your
fuel consumption rate over two different distances, refer to Displays on Control Display or
Trip computer*.

75
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<

Reference

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 gallons/
70 liters. You will find information on refueling
on page 194.

Communications Entertainment

> Average fuel consumption

Navigation

> Average speed

Everything under control

To reset average fuel consumption: press BC
button on turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Displays on Control Display
You can also call up the computer via the iDrive.
For explanation of principle, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to open
"Navigation".
Without navigation system*:
Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

> Distance to destination:
> Entering a distance manually in the computer, see below.
> Entering a destination in the navigation
system*, refer to page 133.
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption

Resetting values
You can reset the values for the average speed
and average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. To confirm your selection, press the controller again.

Entering a distance manually
1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the
controller.

4. Select "Onboard info" and press the controller.

2. Turn the controller to select the distance to
your destination. If needed, hold it against a
slight resistance to enter a larger difference.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
> Estimated time of arrival at destination:
> Entering a distance manually in the computer, see below.
> Entering a destination in the navigation
system*, refer to page 133.
> Cruising range

The distance is automatically preset during the
destination guidance of the navigation system*.

Trip computer*
The trip computer is suitable, for example, for a
vacation trip.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system*:
Open "Car Data".

76
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

3. Press the controller.

Service requirements

> Departure time
> Driving time
> Distance traveled
> Average speed

Driving tips

Controls

4. Select "Trip computer" and press the controller.

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item.
3. Press the controller.

Display options
You can display the computer or the trip computer in the assistance window.
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the controller.

The remaining driving distance and the date for
the next maintenance are displayed briefly with
the ignition switched on.
Your BMW Service Advisor can determine your vehicle's current service
requirements by reading out the data stored in
the remote control.<

Additional information
You can select a display of more detailed information on the maintenance scope on the Control Display. For explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.

Communications Entertainment

Starting or stopping the trip computer, or resetting all values:

Navigation

> Average fuel consumption

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

2. Select "Onboard info" or "Trip computer".

77
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

Everything under control

4. Select "Service requirements" and press
the controller.

Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching. Please
arrange a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.

Entering dates for state emission and
vehicle inspections*
5. Select "Status" and press the controller.

Make sure the date on the Control Display is
always set correctly, refer to page 82, otherwise
the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.
4. Select "Service requirements" and press
the controller.

The display shows a list of selected service and
maintenance procedures, as well as legally
mandated inspections.

5. Select "Status" and press the controller.
6. Select "Emission inspect." or "State
inspection" and press the controller.

You can request more detailed information on
every entry.
Select the entry and press the controller.

7. Select "Set service date" and press the
controller. The month is highlighted.
8. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

78
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

10. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
11. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.

disappears after a short time. The warning
lamps and text messages are stored and can be
displayed later, also refer to page 80.

Explanatory text messages

Controls

To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

At a glance

9. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.

Check Control

Navigation

Text message at the bottom edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

Indicator and warning lamps

You can display additional information on most
Check Control messages later, e.g. on the
cause of the malfunction and on corresponding
need for action, see below.
Indicator and warning lamps can light up both in
the display area 1 and in the display 2 in various
combinations and colors.

In the case of corresponding urgency, this information is displayed immediately when the
related lamp lights up.
Exit the displayed information:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

The Check Control monitors functions in the
vehicle and issues a message if there is a malfunction in the monitored systems. This kind of
Check Control message consists of indicator
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster,
and if necessary an acoustic signal and text
messages at the bottom of the Control Display.

Driving tips

The concept

Less important messages disappear after
approx. 20 seconds, but remain in memory.

79
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

means that a Check Control message has
been generated. The symbol continues to be
visible even when the Check Control message

Important Check Control messages continue to
be displayed until the malfunctions have been
corrected. They cannot be deleted. If a number
of malfunctions occur simultaneously, they are
displayed in succession.

Mobility

Importance of Check Control
messages

Everything under control

4. Select "Check Control messages" and
press the controller.

To hide these Check Control messages:
Press the CHECK button on turn signal lever.

Displaying stored Check Control
messages

5. Select a text message and press the controller.

1. Hold the button down:
The first stored message is displayed.

To exit the display:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
2. Press the button:
When the button is pressed again, a different message is displayed.

Indication of malfunction urgency

Displaying additional information later
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
stored Check Control messages are also displayed with the following symbols:
No malfunctions are present in the monitored systems.
Malfunctions are present in the monitored systems. Depending on the malfunction, supplementary information is
shown on the Control Display.

80
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.

Displays after completion of trip

At a glance

The symbols also indicate the status of the service requirements display, refer to page 77.

> when you press the CHECK button again
for approximately 2 seconds

Speed limit

6. Turn the controller to set the limit. If
needed, hold it against a slight resistance
to enter a larger difference.
7. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The limit is automatically activated.

Applying your current speed as limit

You can enter a speed and a Check Control
message indicates when you have reached this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Select "Select current speed" and press the
controller. The system adopts your current
speed as the limit.

Displaying, setting or changing limit

Stopwatch

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system*:
Open "Car Data".

Select "On" and press the controller.
Limit is automatically activated.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system*:
Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

81
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

Activating limit

Driving tips

> automatically after a brief period

Navigation

The display goes out

5. Select the speed value and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

Before the display disappears, you can display
the messages once again. Press the CHECK
button for approx. 2 seconds. If several messages are present, you can continue to press
the CHECK button to view them in succession.

Controls

Malfunction reports generated during the trip
are shown consecutively when you switch off
the ignition.

Everything under control

4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the controller.

Starting, stopping or resetting

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Display settings"
is selected and press the controller.

> Select "Start" and press the controller.
The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.
> Select "Reset" and press the controller.
The stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it
was running beforehand.
> Select "Stop" and press the controller.
This stops the timer.

Taking an intermediate time reading
Select "Interim time" and press the controller.
The interim time appears below the ongoing
primary stopwatch count.
All of the remaining functions remain
available at all times while the stopwatch
is running. The stopwatch continues operation
in the background.<

Setting time
1. Move the controller once to the front if necessary to change to the first field from the
top.

Settings on Control Display
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
button once or twice until
the start menu appears.

82
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Setting date

3. Turn the controller until "Set time" is
selected and press the controller.

2. Select "Set date" and press the controller.
The first section of the date display is highlighted, in this case the month.

5. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the date is stored.

Changing date format
Making settings

1. Select "Date format" and press the controller.

1. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.

2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.

2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

The changed time is stored.

Switching on hour signal*

Brightness of Control Display

You will hear three tones just before each full
hour.

The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the basic setting.

Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.
The hour signal is activated.

1. Select "Brightness" and press the controller.

Navigation

4. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next setting is highlighted.

Communications Entertainment

3. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

Driving tips

Controls

1. Select "Date" and press the controller.

At a glance

2. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected
and press the controller.

Setting time format

2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

83
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

1. Select "Time format" and press the controller.

Everything under control

2. If necessary, move the controller to the right
to select "Display".

3. Select and activate the desired language by
pressing the controller.

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Units of measure
You can change the units of measure for consumption, distances, temperature and pressure.
1. Select "Units" and press the controller.

2. Select the menu item to be set and press
the controller.
3. Select the desired unit of measure and
press the controller.
The settings are stored for the remote key currently in use.

Language on Control Display
1. Select "Languages" and press the controller.

2. Select "Text language" and press the controller. You can change the language of the
text displays.

84
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

PDC Park Distance Control*

At a glance

Technology for comfort, convenience and
safety
Manual deactivation

The system starts to operate automatically
approx. 1 second after you select reverse gear
or move the selector lever into the R position
with the engine running or the ignition switched
on.
Wait this short period before driving.

Manual activation

An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
> if you remain in front of an object that was
only detected by one of the corner sensors
> if you drive parallel to a wall

Malfunction
The LED in the button flashes and a message
appears on the Control Display. PDC is malfunctioning. Have the system checked.
To prevent this problem, keep the sensors
clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure
that they will continue to operate effectively. Do
not spray the sensors with high-pressure cleaners for long periods and maintain a distance of
at least 4 in/10 cm to them.

PDC with visual warning*
Press button, the LED lights up.

You can also have the system show distances
to objects on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are already shown there before
a signal tone sounds. The setting is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
85

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving tips
Navigation

When nearing an object, the position is correspondingly indicated by an interval tone. Thus,
an object detected to the left rear of the vehicle
will be indicated by a signal tone from the left
rear speaker, etc. As the distance between
vehicle and object decreases, the intervals
between the tones become shorter. If the distance to the nearest object falls to below
roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone
sounds.

Communications Entertainment

Automatic activation

Signal tones

Mobility

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed, otherwise the physical circumstances would mean
that the system warning was too late.<

After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is
switched off and the LED goes out. You can
reactivate the system manually as needed.

Reference

The PDC assists you when you are parking.
Acoustic signals and an optical display* alert
you to the approach of an object from behind
your vehicle. To measure the distance, there
are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper.
The range of these sensors is approx. 7 ft/2 m.
However, an acoustic warning first sound for
the sensors at the front and at the two rear corners at approx. 24 in/60 cm, and for the center
rear sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.

Controls

Press the button again; the LED goes out.

The concept

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "PDC" is selected and press
the controller.

Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW is equipped with an extended array
of systems designed to enhance and maintain
vehicle stability under extreme conditions.

ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely refer to page 125.

CBC Cornering Brake Control
When braking during curves or when braking
during a lane change, driving stability and steering response are improved further.
5. Select "PDC display on" and press the controller.
The PDC screen is activated.
The display appears on the Control Display as
soon as PDC is activated.

System limits
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Even when sensors are provided, there is a blind spot in which objects can
no longer be detected. This applies especially
in those cases where the system approaches
the physical constraints of ultrasonic measurement, as occurs with tow bars and trailer couplings, and in the vicinity of thin or wedgeshaped objects. Low objects already displayed,
e.g. a curb, can disappear from the detection
area of the sensors again before a continuous
tone sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g.
ledges, cannot be detected. Loud sources of
sound, inside and outside the vehicle, could
drown out the PDC signal tone.<

Electronic brake-force distribution
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

DBC Dynamic Brake Control
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking. This system exploits all of the benefits provided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when starting off and accelerating. DSC also
identifies unstable driving conditions, such as a
loss of traction at the rear of the vehicle or sliding of the vehicle in its front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
output and through braking actions in the individual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the

86
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:

Deactivating DSC

> When driving on snowy inclines, in slush, or
on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces

At a glance

driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional
safety margin further by taking risks.<

> When driving with snow chains*

Activating DSC
Press the button; the indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.

For better control
The indicator lamp flashes:
DSC controls the drive forces and
brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up:
DSC is deactivated.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control
DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive output is optimized for particular road conditions,
e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The system assures the maximal drive output, but with
reduced driving stability. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropriate caution.

The indicator lamp lights up:
DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster goes out.

xDrive on 525xi, 530xi
xDrive is the 4-wheel drive system of your
BMW. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC
further optimize the traction and dynamic driving characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system
xDrive variably distributes the drive torque to
the front and rear axle depending on the driving
situation and prevailing road conditions.

87
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation

The indicator lamp flashes:
DTC controls the drive forces and
brake forces.

Communications Entertainment

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.

For better control

Mobility

A message appears on the Control Display.
Please note any supplementary information
that appears there.

Press the button briefly; the DTC indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up.

Reference

Press the button until the DSC indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up, but not longer
than approx. 10 seconds. DTC Dynamic Traction Control and DSC are deactivated together.
Stabilizing and drive output promoting actions
are no longer executed. In addition, the stability
promoting intervention of the active steering*
is deactivated, refer to page 93.

Driving tips

Activating DTC

Controls

> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or starting off in deep snow or on loose ground

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

HDC Hill Descent Control on 525xi,
530xi

4. Select "HDC" and press the controller.

The concept
HDC is a system for driving downhill in steep
terrain. This system reduces vehicle speed on
steep downhill gradients, thus allowing you to
maintain even better control of your BMW
under these conditions. The vehicle moves at
approximately twice walking speed without
active intervention from the driver.
HDC is available for activation at vehicle speeds
below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving
down steep hills with a speed below approx.
22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces speed
automatically down to approximately double
walking speed, approx. 7 mph/12 km/h, and
then maintains this speed at a constant.
You can use the accelerator or brakes to vary
this automatically controlled speed within a
range extending from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h to
15 mph/25 km/h.
You can specify a target speed within the same
range by using the lever of the cruise control.

Activating HDC

5. Select "HDC on" and press the controller.
The HDC display is shown in the instrument
cluster.
If the vehicle is automatically braked, a message
is displayed on the Control Display for approx.
20 seconds.

Deactivating HDC
When you use the programmable buttons on
the steering wheel or via iDrive, the HDC display
goes out.
Over approx. 37 mph/60 km/h HDC is immediately deactivated, and after approx. 10 seconds
when the ignition is switched off.

You can activate HDC:

Using HDC

> with the programmable buttons on the
steering wheel, refer to page 53

Manual transmission:
Use HDC in low gears and reverse gear.

> or via iDrive

Automatic transmission:
You can use HDC in every drive position.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.

Displays in instrument cluster

2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.

Display for target speed

HDC display

88
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Dynamic Drive is based on active stabilizers on
the front and rear axles. Suspension compliance adapts to suit driving conditions, varying
from performance-oriented during cornering to
smooth and comfort-oriented when the vehicle
is proceeding in a straight line. During vehicle
operation, the system continuously runs
through closed-loop control cycles lasting only
fractions of a second.
The system assumes operational status each
time you start the engine.

Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up yellow and
a message is shown on the Control Display. There is a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
If a malfunction occurs, please remember
to adapt your speed accordingly, especially in curves.
The suspension will be noticeably softer and
the vehicle will display a greater tendency to tilt
during cornering and in crosswinds.
If a message stating that you should stop is
shown on the Control Display, stop at a suitable
location and switch off the engine as soon as
possible. In this case the oil level in the reservoir
may have dropped below the minimum, possibly owing to a leak in the hydraulic system.
Do not continue driving, but instead contact
your BMW center.<

Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor keeps track of the inflation pressures in the tires as you drive. The system provides an alert whenever the inflation
pressure drops significantly in relation to the
pressure in another tire.
In the event of a pressure loss, the rolling radius
and therefore the rotation speed of the wheels
change. This change is detected and is
reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be initialized for the correct tire inflation pressure.

89
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance
Controls

The warning lamp for self-leveling suspension lights up yellow and a message
is shown on the Control Display. A malfunction has occurred in the self-leveling suspension. Stop and check the vehicle. If it is considerably lower at the rear than at the front, and
possibly also on one side – rear left compared to
rear right –, go to the nearest BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Drive with appropriate caution in the
meantime. The vehicle has reduced ground
clearance and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced. Even if the position of the vehicle
is normal, go to the nearest BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Driving tips

Dynamic Drive minimizes body roll and optimizes vehicle stability during cornering and
evasive maneuvers.

Malfunction

Navigation

The concept

xDrive: the vehicle is raised somewhat at
the rear after locking. This is normal and is
linked to minor noises.<

Communications Entertainment

Dynamic Drive*

Sports Wagon:
Self-leveling suspension

Mobility

If the HDC display goes out in the HDC mode or
is not shown:
HDC is temporarily not available, as the brake
temperature is too high.

Reference

Malfunction

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

The initialization must be repeated after
each time the tire inflation pressure is corrected and after every tire or wheel change.<

6. Select "Set tire pressure" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

System limits
The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate
sudden severe tire damage caused by
outside factors and does not detect a natural,
even pressure drop in all four tires.<
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration
> Driving with snow chains*
When you are driving with the compact wheel*
the Flat Tire Monitor is unable to function.

Initializing system
The initialization finishes during driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is continued automatically. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains* or compact wheel*.<
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "FTM" and press the controller.

8. Start to drive.
The message "Initializing..." is displayed.
The initialization finishes during driving. Then
the message "Status: FTM active" appears on
the Control Display again.

Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up red. A message appears on the Control Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal sounds.
There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure
loss.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle carefully. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Identify damaged tire.
If identification is not possible, contact a BMW center.<
3. Replace the damaged wheel, refer to
Changing wheels on page 215.

Run-flat tires*
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If the vehicle is not equipped with runflat tires, refer to page 201, do not
continue driving. Continuing to drive with a
flat tire could cause severe accidents.<

5. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

2. At the next opportunity, check the air pressure in all four tires.

90
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Drive reservedly and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of
pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This
includes reduced tracking stability in braking,
extended braking distance and altered natural
steering characteristics.
If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while
the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final
failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and
stop at a suitable location as soon as possible,
otherwise pieces of the tire could become
detached and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, but instead contact your BMW
center.<

At a glance
Controls

System limits
TPM cannot announce sudden serious
tire damage caused by external influences.<
The system does not function properly if it has
not been reset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite
correct tire inflation pressures.
The system is inactive and cannot display a flat
tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM
electronics, e.g. a compact wheel, or if TPM is
temporarily interfered with by other systems or
devices which use the same radio frequency.

Status display on Control Display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure
changes during driving into account. A correction is only required if requested by TPM with
the color.

Green
The tire pressure matches the learned set state.

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*

"TPM active" is displayed on the Control Display.

The concept

A wheel is yellow

TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system reports when
the tire inflation pressure has dropped considerably in one or several tires.

Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. A message appears on the
Control Display.

91
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving tips

> With a full load:
from 4 persons, luggage compartment
or cargo area full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km

Reset the system again after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<

Navigation

> With a medium load:
2 persons, luggage compartment or
cargo area full, or 4 persons without
luggage:
approx. 94 miles/150 km

Always use wheels with TPM electronics, as
otherwise fault-free operation of the system is
not ensured.

Communications Entertainment

> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km

In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure.

Mobility

3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guide values:

Functional requirement

Reference

If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. The system
must then be initialized.<

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

All wheels are yellow

7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires. A message appears on the Control
Display.

Gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reasons for this can be:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary interference due to systems or
devices which use the same radio frequency
> Malfunction

Resetting system
Reset the system again after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
Resetting finishes during driving, which can be
interrupted at any time. When driving resumes,
resetting is continued automatically. Do not
reset the system when driving with a compact
wheel*.

8. Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and
"Resetting TPM..." is displayed.
After a few minutes of driving, the set tire inflation pressures in the tires are applied as the set
values to be monitored. Resetting finishes during driving. The tires are shown in gray on the
Control Display and "Status: TPM active" is displayed again.
If a flat tire is detected during resetting
and applying the tire inflation pressures,
all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Display. The message "Tire low!" is displayed.<

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.

Message with low tire inflation
pressure

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message appears on the Control Display. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "TPM" and press the controller.

1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle carefully. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Check whether your vehicle is equipped
with standard tires or run-flat tires.
You will recognize run-flat tires by a
circular symbol containing the letters
RSC on the side of the tire, refer to
page 201.<

5. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
6. Select "Reset" and press the controller.

92
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

The yellow warning light flashes and
then lights up continuously. The tires
are shown in gray on the Control Display and a message is displayed. No flat tire can
be detected.

Run-flat tires*

A message like this is displayed in the following
situations:

1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If the vehicle is not equipped with runflat tires, refer to page 201, do not
continue driving. Continuing to drive with a
flat tire could cause severe accidents.<
2. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guide values:
> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, luggage compartment or
cargo area full, or 4 persons without
luggage:
approx. 95 miles/150 km
> With a full load:
from 4 persons, luggage compartment
or cargo area full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive reservedly and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of
pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This
includes reduced tracking stability in braking,
extended braking distance and altered natural
steering characteristics.
If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while

> In case of a malfunction;
have the system checked.
> If a wheels is mounted without TPM electronics
> If TPM is temporarily interfered with by
other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency.

Active steering*
The concept
The active steering is a system that actively varies the steering angle of the front wheels in relation to the steering wheel movements.
When you are driving in the low road speed
range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steering angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes
very direct. In the higher speed range, on the
other hand, the steering angle is reduced more
and more. This improves the handling capability
of your BMW over the entire speed range.
In critical situations, the system can make targeted corrections to the steering angle provided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing
intervention is simultaneously deactivated
when DSC is switched off, refer to page 87.

93
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance
Controls

Have the tire replaced by a BMW center or a
workshop informed on handling TPM which
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.

Driving tips

Malfunction

Navigation

In contrast to a compact wheel, a spare wheel is
equipped with the necessary TPM electronics
and also monitored after mounting and after
resetting the system.

Communications Entertainment

2. Replace the damaged wheel or wheels,
refer to Changing wheels on page 215.

Mobility

1. If all four wheels are shown in yellow, identify the damaged tire on the vehicle.

the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final
failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and
stop at a suitable location as soon as possible,
otherwise pieces of the tire could become
detached and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, but instead contact your BMW
center.<

Reference

Standard tires

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

Brake force display

Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up yellow and
a message is shown on the Control Display. The active steering is no longer
operational. At low speeds, greater steering
wheel movements are required, whereas at
higher speeds, the vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering wheel movements. The
stability-promoting intervention can also be
deactivated. Proceed cautiously and drive
defensively. Have the system checked.

Left-hand picture: normal braking.
Right-hand picture: heavy braking.

Airbags

The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1

Front airbags

Head airbags

Side airbags in front and rear

Protective action
To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on
page 45.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side airbag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.

The airbags are deliberately not triggered in
every impact situation, e.g. less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way. Do not attempt to
remove the airbag retention system from the
vehicle. Do not modify or tamper with either the
wiring or the individual components in the airbag system. This category includes the upholstery in the center of the steering wheel, on the
instrument panel, the doors and the roof pillars
along with the sides of the headliner. Do not
attempt to remove or dismantle the steering
wheel. Do not touch the individual components
immediately after the system has been triggered, because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of airbag generators executed only by a BMW center

94
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, observe the safety information and handling instructions under Transporting children safely refer to page 54.
The front and side airbag on the front passenger side can be deactivated for teenagers and
adults in certain seat positions; then the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
up. In these cases, change the seat position so
that the front passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired
status cannot be produced by changing the
seat position, transport the corresponding person on the rear seat. Do not fit seat covers, seat
cushion padding, ball mats or other items onto
the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not lay
objects under the seat which could press
against the seat from below. Otherwise a correct evaluation of the occupied seat surface
cannot be ensured.<

> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a child restraint system intended for the
purpose is properly detected on the seat.
The front and side airbag on the front passenger side are not activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient height is detected on the seat.
The front and side airbag on the front passenger side are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up when
the seat is empty.
However, the front and side airbag on the
front passenger side are not activated.

Driving tips

The indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags indicates the operating status of the front
and side airbag on the front passenger side
depending on the seat occupation. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger
airbags are activated or deactivated.

Navigation

The current status of the front passenger
airbag, i.e. deactivated or activated, is
indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior
rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front
passenger airbags in the following.<

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.

Communications Entertainment

The occupation of the seat is detected by evaluating the impression on the occupied seat surface of the front passenger seat. The front and
side airbag on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated accordingly by the system.

Mobility

Automatic deactivation of front
passenger airbags

Controls

Warnings and information on the airbags is also
provided on the sun visors.

At a glance

Operating state of front passenger
airbags

95
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

or a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel and has the required explosives
licenses. Unprofessional attempts to service
the system could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired airbag activation, either of
which could result in personal injury.<

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

Operational readiness of airbag system

From radio readiness, refer to page 58, the
warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the
operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the safety belt tensioners.

Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up from radio
readiness.
> Warning lamp lights up continuously.
Have the airbag system checked immediately in case of a malfunction, otherwise
there is a danger that the airbag system may not
respond in the expected manner in an accident
despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<

Switching on/off
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on:
Press the button to activate or deactivate the
Head-Up Display.

Head-Up Display*
The concept
With the Head-Up Display important information is projected into the driver's field of view,
e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to
take in this information without looking away
from the road.

Navigation instructions

Display
> Cruise control
> Active cruise control

Speed

96
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.

4. Select "Brightness" and press the controller.

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

At a glance

Selecting displays

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Notes
The visibility of the displays in the Head-Up Display is influenced by:
6. Press the controller.
The information is shown on the HeadUp Display.
The settings are stored for the remote key currently in use.

Setting brightness
The brightness of the display is automatically
adapted to the ambient lighting conditions.
However, you can change the base setting.
With the low beams switched on, the brightness
can also be adjusted with the knurled wheel of
the instrument lighting.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.

> Sunglasses with certain polarization filters
> Certain seating positions
> Objects on the cover of the Head-Up Display
> Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting
conditions
If the image is distorted, please have the basic
setting checked at a BMW center.

Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system. The shape
of the windshield complies with the requirements of the Head-Up Display to enable a precise display. A film in the windshield prevents
the double images from being displayed.
Windshield replacement should be carried out
by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Care instructions
You can find everything you need to know on
this topic by consulting the separate Caring for
your vehicle brochure.
97
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation

6. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.

Communications Entertainment

5. Move the controller to the left to select
"Head-Up Display".

Mobility

5. Select desired information of Head-Up Display.

Reference

4. Select "Head-Up Display" and press the
controller.

Driving tips

Controls

3. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

Any improvement in detection depends on
many factors such as the object size and temperature compared to the surroundings, or
other nearby objects, the visual recognition
skills of the driver, weather conditions, and
other factors.

Driving hints
Only clean the cover of the Head-Up Display with a soft, lint-free cloth or with a
display cleaning cloth, otherwise damage may
result.<

BMW Night Vision*
The concept
BMW Night Vision is a driver assistance system
that is designed to provide enhanced vision for
certain objects at night. This can be especially
helpful for detecting people and larger animals.
When objects are detected, the driver may be
able to take appropriate action sooner. For
example, the driver may identify and detect the
presence of persons or animals in the road
ahead or off to the sides and can be more alert,
slow down or stop, blow the horn etc. The driver
can decide which actions are appropriate and
then react accordingly.
A certain area in front of the vehicle is viewed by
an infrared camera and a generated image is
shown on the Control Display. The resulting
thermal image shows the relative heat radiation
of the objects present in the camera's field of
view. Warmer objects appear brighter and
cooler objects appear darker. Contrast is
dependent on the temperature difference
between the objects and the background and
on the amount of heat radiation of the object
itself. As a result, it is quite possible that a person is not continually recognizable as a person
in shape, since the thermal radiation can be
affected by different clothing which blocks heat
loss. Objects with little temperature difference
to the surrounding area, or little heat radiation
are less noticeable, for example in cold weather.

With the system active, periodically but briefly,
glance at the thermal image on the Control Display to notice objects that could be people or
larger animals. The glance should be similar to
glancing at the rear view mirror. Do not stare at
the image for long periods while driving, as this
will remove attention from the road. If you notice
an object of interest ahead, be prepared to slow
down or stop, blow the horn, or take other
appropriate action.

System limits
The system is designed to supplement but not
replace forward vision through the windshield.
The driver is responsible for safe driving at
night. BMW Night Vision is not designed to be
used as a continuous viewing window for driving at night.

No system, no matter how sophisticated, can
operate without limitations. BMW Night Vision
operation is subject to physical and environmental limitations that will reduce the ability of
the system to detect and display a clear thermal
image. Some of the situations in which these
limitations can occur are:
> on steep hilltops or depressions and in tight
curves
> in tunnels, as the contrast is inherently low
> when the camera lens is dirty

98
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance
To prevent driving without headlamps, at a
speed of more than approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and
when dark, the thermal image on the Control
Display is only shown when the low beams are
on.

Deactivating BMW Night Vision
> Press the

button.

Activating BMW Night Vision

> Press the button on the steering wheel.

1. Turn the light switch to position 2 or 3, refer
to page 101.

> Press the

2. With low beams switched on:
> Press the
button. Depending on the
vehicle's equipment, the location of the
button may differ somewhat.

button.

> Via iDrive", refer to Selecting settings.

Selecting settings
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Activate BMW Night Vision.
2. Press the controller to display the menu
items.

Mobility

> Press one of the programmable buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 53.

Controls

Due to the system's need to adjust periodically,
a still image is displayed at certain intervals for
fractions of a second. This is normal and not an
indication of a problem.

The image will be displayed on the Control Display after a few seconds. Depending on the last
mode selected, either the normal or full screen
image will be displayed.

99
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

BMW Night Vision's potential benefits
can be limited by the driving style of the
driver, the size and relative temperature of the
detected objects, dirt or contamination on the
camera lens, adverse weather like snow, rain or
fog, and other factors not mentioned here. It will
always be the driver's responsibility to drive at a
speed and in a manner that recognizes potential
hazards and adjust accordingly.
BMW Night Vision is not a substitute or replacement for driver responsibility or for accommodating the visibility conditions and the traffic situation. The forward view illuminated by the
headlamps must always be the basis for making
safe driving decisions, otherwise a safety risk
will result.<

Driving tips

> when the image briefly freezes during normal system adjustment.

Navigation

> when displaying very hot objects such as
transformers, car exhausts etc.

Communications Entertainment

> in dense fog, heavy rain or snowfall

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

3. Select the menu item and press the controller:
> "End Night Vision":
Deactivate BMW Night Vision.
> "Zoom":
At higher speeds, the image is zoomed
in.
> "Curve mode":
Depending on the steering angle and
other parameters, the image sections
follows the course of the road to some
degree.

To minimize icing, the camera lens is automatically heated. However, it may be necessary to
clean the camera lens manually under severe
weather conditions. When doing so, cautiously
remove any debris, ice or snow. To avoid damage to the lens, do not use sharp or abrasive
instruments to clean ice, snow, or dirt off the
lens.
When the windshield is cleaned with the headlamps on, the camera lens area is automatically
sprayed as well. Refer to page 65.

> "Full screen":
The image is shown on the entire Control Display.
> "Contrast":
The contrast of the screen can be
adjusted.
> "Brightness":
The brightness of the screen can be
adjusted.
"Curve mode" can only be activated with
the "Zoom" function switched on. With
"Full screen" activated, "Curve mode" and
"Zoom" cannot be selected.<
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
To exit the menu:
The image will automatically disappear after
approx. 5 seconds.

Cleaning camera

The function of the camera may be affected by
heavy rain and fog, dirt, snow or ice on the lens.
When this occurs, the displayed image on the
Control Display may become gray.
100
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

If desired, the light switch can be left in the
position 3. The exterior lighting is automatically
switched off after switching off the vehicle.
0

Lights off and daytime running lamps*

Parking lamps and daytime running lamps*

Low beams

Automatic headlamp control*, daytime running lamps*, Adaptive Head Light* and
high-beam assistant*

Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking. For lighting on one
side for parking as an additional feature, refer to
page 102.
The parking lamps drain the battery. Do
not leave them switched on for long periods of time, as otherwise it may no longer be
possible to start the engine.<

Low beams
The low beams light up in switch position 2 only
with the engine running. Otherwise the parking
lamps are lit.

The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the sensors
cannot detect fog of hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
lamps manually under these conditions.<

Pathway lighting
When you activate the headlamp flasher after
parking the vehicle and switching off the lamps,
the low beams will come on for a brief period.
You can set the duration or deactivate the function via iDrive.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.

At a glance
Controls

The low beams remain switched on independent of the ambient lighting conditions when you switch on the fog lamps*.<

Driving tips

When driving into a tunnel with bright overhead
lighting, switching on of the lights may be
delayed.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.

Navigation

Parking lamps/low beams

Communications Entertainment

Lamps

Automatic headlamp control*

101
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

In the switch position 3, the system activates
the low beams and switches them on or off in
response to changes in ambient light conditions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk
and in case of precipitation. Adaptive Head
Light* is active. The LED next to the symbol is
illuminated when the low beams are on.

Lamps

4. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.

Malfunction
The LED next to the symbol for automatic headlamp control flashes. Adaptive Head Light is
malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.

High beams/
roadside parking lamps
5. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the
controller.
6. Turn the controller to select the desired
duration.
7. Press the controller to apply the setting.

Daytime running lamps*
If desired, the light switch can remain in position 0, 1 or 3.
In position 0 and 3 the exterior lighting is automatically switched off after the vehicle is
switched off. In position 1 the parking lamps
light up after the ignition is switched off.
Switch on the parking lamps if required as
described under Parking lamps.

Adaptive Head Light*
The concept
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.

High beams

Headlamp flasher

Roadside parking lamps

Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one
side of your vehicle when parking. When using
this function, comply with national regulations:

Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever in the
desired direction 3, past the resistance point.
The roadside parking lamps drain the battery. Do not leave them switched on for
long periods of time, as otherwise it may no
longer be possible to start the engine.<

Activating Adaptive Head Light

Switching off

In switch position 3, the Adaptive Head Light is
active and the automatic headlamp control is
switched on, refer to page 101.

Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction 3 up to the resistance point.

To avoid dazzling oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Head Light is not active when driving in
reverse and points toward the passenger side
when the vehicle is stopped.

102
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Activating high-beam assistant
1. Turn the light switch to switch position 3,
refer to page 101.
2. Press the turn signal lever in the high beam
direction with the low beams switched on.

System limits
The high-beam assistant cannot replace
personal decisions on the benefits of
using the high beams. In situations which
require this, you should therefore switch to the
low beams manually to avoid a safety risk.<
In the following example situations, the system
does not operate or only with limitations and a
personal reaction may be required:
> Under extremely unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation

The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the high-beam
assistant is activated. The assistant
automatically switches between high and low
beams, whereby the system reacts to oncoming traffic and traffic ahead, as well as to sufficient lighting, e.g. towns/cities.

Manually switching between high and
low beams
You can intervene at any time if you wish or the
situation requires.
> If the high-beam assistant has switched on
the high beams, however you nevertheless
want to use the low beams, simply switch to
the low beams with the turn signal lever.
The high-beam assistant is deactivated in
the process.

> For perceiving road users with poor lighting
of their own, e.g. pedestrians, cyclists, people on horseback, horse-drawn vehicles,
with train or ship traffic close to the road and
wild animals crossing the road
> In tight curves, on steep crowns or depressions, with cross traffic or partially concealed oncoming traffic on the freeway
> In poorly lit places and with highly reflective
signs

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips

> You use the headlamp flasher as usual with
low beams.

Navigation

> If the high-beam assistant has switched on
the low beams, however you nevertheless
want to use the high beams, switch to the
high beams in the accustomed manner. The
system is deactivated in the process and
you must switch to the low beams manually.
To reactivate the system, briefly press the
turn signal lever in the high beam direction
again.

Communications Entertainment

This system automatically switches the high
beams on and off again. A sensor on the front of
the inside rearview mirror controls the process.
The assistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation
allows. This reduces the strain on you while at
the same time providing you with the best possible visibility. Of course, you can intervene at
any time and switch the high beams on and off
in the accustomed manner.

> In the low speed range
> When the windshield is fogged up, dirty or
covered with stickers, vignettes etc. in the
area of the inside rearview mirror
> When the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor
on the front side of the inside rearview mirror with a cloth moistened with a small
amount of glass cleaner

103
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

The concept

To reactivate the system, briefly press the
turn signal lever in the high beam direction
again.

Reference

High-beam assistant*

Lamps

Fog lamps*

Interior lamps
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry
lighting and courtesy lamps* are controlled
automatically.
With the courtesy lamps, LED lights are located
in the door handles to illuminate the exterior
area before the doors.

The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The
green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up whenever the fog lamps are on.

To protect the battery, all lamps in the
vehicle are switched off approx. 15 minutes after radio readiness is switched off, refer
to Start/Stop button on page 58.<

Switching interior lamps on and off
manually

The fog lamps are switched off whenever the
high beams are switched on.
If the automatic headlamp control is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the fog lamps.<

Instrument lighting
Press the button.
If you want the interior lamps to remain off continuously, maintain pressure on the button for
approx. 3 seconds.

Reading lamps

You can control the lighting intensity by using
the knurled wheel.

Reading lamps are located in the front and rear
adjacent to the interior lamps. Press the button
briefly to switch the lamps on and off.

104
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

Climate

Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows

Air for the upper body region, refer to
Front ventilation on page 108

10 Temperature, right side of passenger
compartment

Air to footwell

11 Residual heat mode

Temperature, left side of passenger
compartment

12 AUTO program

Maximum cooling

Defrosting windows and removing
condensation

14 LED for parked car ventilation*

Air volume, manual

Switching off automatic climate control

16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed

Switching cooling function on and off
manually

13 AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

Automatic climate control

105
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

15 Rear window defroster

Climate

The current setting for air distribution is displayed on the Control Display.

3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the
controller.

A congenial climate
The AUTO program offers the optimum air distribution and air volume for virtually all conditions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you
only need to select an interior temperature
pleasant to you.
The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile
settings on page 29.

AUTO program
The AUTO program handles the
adjustment of air distribution to the
windshield and side windows, in
the direction of the upper body, and in the footwell, as well as the air volume. It also adapts
your instructions for the temperature to outside
influences throughout the year.
The cooling is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program. At the same time, a condensation sensor controls the program in such
a way that window condensation is prevented
as much as possible.

Intensity of AUTO program

4. Select the desired intensity and press the
controller.
The marked intensity of the automatic
program is switched on.

Temperature
Set the desired temperature individually on the driver's and front
passenger side.
The automatic climate control
adjusts this temperature as quickly as possible
at any time of year, if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then
keeps it constant.
When switching between different temperature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.<

To meet your individual needs, you can weaken
or strengthen the intensity of the automatic climate control.

Adjusting temperature in upper body
region

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.

2. Open "Climate".

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

1. Open the start menu.
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the controller.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".

106
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

6. Turn the controller to adjust the air distribution.

Controls

4. Select the field by moving the controller and
turning the controller to adjust the temperature.

Air volume, manual
You can adjust the air volume by
turning. You can reactivate the
automatic mode for the air volume
with the AUTO button.

Manual air distribution
You can specify the air distribution.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Climate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the controller.
The driver's and front passenger side can
be adjusted separately with the fields on the
right or left side.
4. Select the driver's or front passenger side
if necessary.
Move the controller to the right or left
repeatedly until the driver's or front passenger side is selected.
5. Select the desired field by moving the controller.

Airflow for the upper body

Air to footwell

Airflow for the upper body

Air to footwell

Pressing the AUTO button cancels the air
distribution settings on the Control Display and vice versa.<

Switching cooling function on and off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before also reheating it as
required, according to the temperature setting.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automatically with the AUTO program. The passenger
compartment can only be cooled with the
engine running.

Navigation

Front passenger side:

Communications Entertainment

The rear window defroster
switches off automatically after a
while.

Maximum cooling
Maximally cooled air is obtained as
quickly as possible from an outside
temperature above 32 7/0 6 and
with the engine running.
The automatic climate control changes over to
the lowest temperature and switches into the
recirculated-air mode. The maximum air quantity only flows out of the vents for the upper

107
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

Rear window defroster

Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows

Reference

Quickly remove ice and condensation from the windshield and front
side windows.

Driving tips

Driver's side:

Defrosting windows and removing
condensation

Climate

body. Therefore, open these vents for maximum cooling.

The LED lights up when the function is
switched on.

AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control/recirculated-air mode

From radio readiness the interior temperature,
the air volume and the air distribution can be
set.

You can respond to pollutants or
unpleasant odors in the immediate
environment by suspending the
supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle. During
AUC operation, a sensor detects pollutants in
the outside air and controls the shut-off automatically.
By pressing the button repeatedly, you can
request three operating modes:

Switching off automatic climate control
The air volume, the heater and the
cooling function are all switched
off.
You can restart the automatic climate control by pressing any of its buttons
except the REST button.

Front ventilation

> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Right LED on, AUC mode: the system
detects pollutants in the outside air and
shuts off the supply as needed.
> Left LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air is permanently shut off.
If condensation starts to form on the
inside window surfaces during operation
in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch
it off while also increasing the air volume as
required.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
over an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates continuously.<

Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is
used to heat the passenger compartment, e.g. while stopped at a
school to pick up a child.
The function can be switched on when the following conditions are met:
> up to 15 minutes after switching off the
engine

Knurled wheels to smoothly open and close
air vents

Levers to change the air vent direction

Do not drop any foreign objects into the
vent outlets, otherwise these could be
catapulted outwards and lead to injuries.<

Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, for instance, if the interior
has become too warm, etc.

Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and is not directed straight at you.

> with engine at operating temperature
> with sufficient battery voltage
> at an outside temperature below 777/
256

108
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

The air emerges through the upper body region
vent outlets in the instrument panel. These vent
outlets must be open for the system to operate.
The parked car ventilation is operated via iDrive.

At a glance

Rear ventilation

1. Open the start menu.
1

Knurled wheel to smoothly open and close
air vents

Knurled wheel to adjust the temperature:
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer

Levers to change the air vent direction

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press
the controller.

Driving tips

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.

Controls

Switching on and off directly

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

The concept
The parked car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior temperatures.
It is ready to use in the parked-car mode at any
outside temperature.
You can set two different times for the system
to start. The parked car ventilation can also be
switched on and off directly. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, you should refrain from activating it twice in succession without allowing
the battery to be recharged in normal operation
between use.

The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.

Preselecting activation times
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Climate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Activation time" and press the controller.

109
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

Parked car ventilation*

Reference

The parked-car ventilation is switched on.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter
provides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW
center replaces this combined filter as a standard part of your scheduled maintenance.
You can select a display of more detailed information on the Control Display, refer to page 77.

Climate

5. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".

The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes when the parked car
ventilation has switched on.
The parked car ventilation is only available for activation within the next
24 hours. Then it must be activated again.<

6. Select the time and press the controller.
The first time setting is highlighted.

7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next setting is highlighted.
9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the time is stored.

Activating activation time
Move the controller to the left or right to select
"Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and press the controller.

The activation time is activated.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control lights up.

110
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.<

Controls

Programming

To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the integrated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no people, animals or objects are within the travel
range of the device. Also, comply with the
safety precautions of the original hand-held
transmitter.<

Checking compatibility
If you see this symbol on the packaging
or in the manual supplied with the original hand-held transmitter, it is safe to
assume that it is compatible with the integrated
universal remote control.
If you have additional questions, please
contact your BMW center or call:
1-800-355-3515.
Information is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.

Memory buttons

LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 58.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
Press both outer memory buttons 1 for
approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes.
All stored programs are deleted.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 2 in/5 cm to 8 in/20 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the memory buttons 1 depends on the relevant system of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on
the original hand-held transmitter and the
desired memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2
does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance.
5. To program other original hand-held transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.

111
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation

Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to
delete the stored programs beforehand for your
safety, refer to page 112.

Communications Entertainment

The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three memory buttons 1. Then with the ignition switched
on, this programmed memory button 1 can be
used to operate the respective feature. The
LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the
signal.

Driving tips

The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmitters for various remote-controlled accessories,
such as door openers and house alarm systems. The integrated universal remote control
registers and stores signals from the original
hand-held transmitters.

Mobility

The concept

Reference

Integrated universal remote
control*

At a glance

Practical interior accessories

The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the system when the engine is
running or when the ignition is switched on.
If the device can not be used after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmitter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly for a short time
and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this
indicates that the original hand-held transmitter
uses an alternating-code system. In the case of
an alternating-code system, program the memory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code
transmitters.<

The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any additional questions,
please contact your BMW center.<

Deleting stored programs
Press both outer memory buttons 1 for approx.
20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes:
All stored programs are deleted.
Individual programs cannot be deleted.

Sun blinds*
Sun blind for rear window

Alternating-code transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the equipment to be set. You will find information there on the possibilities for synchronization.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<

Press the button on the driver's door.

Sun blinds for rear side windows
Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook
onto bracket.

1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1
of the integrated universal remote control
three times.

112
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Opening

To avoid possibly damaging the lamp,
always ensure that it is switched off
before inserting it in the socket.<

At a glance

Glove compartment

The compartment is the center armrest is
divided into two sections.

Opening cover

Closing

Press the button. The cover opens somewhat
and can be folded upwards.

Fold the cover up.

Locking
Lock with a key.
If you only hand over the remote control
without the integrated key, e.g. for valet
parking, refer to page 28, the glove compartment cannot be unlocked.<

Depending on vehicle equipment, the upper
section contains a compartment with a mat that
can be removed for cleaning or a telephone
cradle*.

Opening upper compartment

Rechargeable flashlight

Communications Entertainment

To prevent injury in the event of an accident while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<

Navigation

Driving tips

Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Controls

Front center armrest

The flashlight is located on the left side of the
glove compartment.
The flashlight can remain plugged in continuously. Pull the flashlight out of the socket when
needed.

113
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Press button and fold cover upward.

Practical interior accessories

Accessing lower compartment

Storage compartments
There are other storage compartments in the
doors as well as in the front and rear center console.
Storage nets are located on the backrests of the
front seats, and a net* is provided in the front
passenger footwell.

Press the button at the front and fold the upper
compartment or the telephone cradle upward.

Ventilating lower compartment
Push the slide in the lower compartment
upward.
Depending on the automatic climate control setting, the temperature inside the
ventilated compartment may be higher than in
the rest of the interior. Should this be the case,
push the slide downward to close off the ventilation.<

Do not stow hard or sharp-edged objects
in the storage nets or the net, otherwise
there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.<

Clothes hooks
Clothes hooks are located near the grab handles in the rear.
When hanging clothing on the hooks,
ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks.
If you do so, they could cause personal injury to
occupants during braking or evasive maneuvers.<

Cup holders

Adjusting

Do not place containers made of glass in
the cup holders. This would lead to an
increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

Opening

Push the illustrated section of the center armrest into the desired position.

Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device, e.g. a
CD or an MP3 player, and play the sound via the
vehicle loudspeakers, refer to page 171.

Briefly press the button.

Closing
Press the cover in the center and push in the
cup holder.

114
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

Ashtray, front

Ashtray, rear

Opening
Slide back the cover.

Controls

Emptying

Press the entire cover down. The ashtray rises
and can be removed.

Cigarette lighter, rear

Press in the lighter with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<

Connecting electrical devices
Sockets
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a
power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum
cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to
approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the
socket due to inserting plugs of different
shapes or sizes. The same is true for all power
outlets in the vehicle.

115
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

Refer to Cigarette lighter, front.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Cigarette lighter, front

Reference

Push the ashtray toward the front: the ashtray
lifts and can be removed.

Driving tips

Emptying

Practical interior accessories

In front passenger footwell

Access to socket:
Fold open the cover.

Sedan:
In luggage compartment

Center armrest, rear

Storage tray:
Pull the cover upward, arrow 1.
Access to cup holders:
Press the button 2 and open the cover

Sedan:
Through-loading system*
Opening

Access to socket:
Fold open the cover.

1. Open the buckle of the center safety belt in
the rear and insert the latch plate at the end
of the belt into the fixture on the rear window shelf.

Sports Wagon:
In cargo area

2. Push the corresponding head restraint
down as far as it will go, refer to page 49.

Access to socket:
Fold open the cover.

116
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Sports Wagon: cargo area

4. The unlocked rear seat back moves forward
slightly. Fold the seat back forward by the
head restraint.

Pull out the roll-up cover and hook it into the
brackets.

Automatic roll-up cover*

When you return the seat to its upright
position, make sure that the retainer
engages properly. If it is not properly engaged,
transported cargo could enter the vehicle during braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger
the vehicle occupants.<
2. Release the latch plate from the bracket on
the rear window shelf and insert it into the
buckle of the center safety belt. The latch
plate must audibly engage.
The lashing eyes in the luggage compartment
provide you with a way to attach luggage compartment nets* or flexible straps for securing
suitcases and luggage, refer to page 128.

When the tailgate or rear window is opened, the
roll-up cover is raised, and when the tailgate
and rear window is closed, it is lowered.
Make sure that the closing area of the rollup cover is clear of obstructions, as otherwise the payload or the roll-up cover may be
damaged.<

Increasing cargo area
The rear seat back is divided. You can fold over
both sides individually to increase the cargo
area.

117
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation

1. Fold the rear seat back into the seating
position and engage.

Communications Entertainment

Closing

When opening the tailgate or rear window, the
roll-up cover is raised. Before closing the tailgate and rear window, press down the roll-up
cover until it engages.

Mobility

Manual roll-up cover

Reference

Do not place heavy or hard objects on the
roll-up cover. If you do so, they may
already pose a danger to vehicle occupants during braking or evasive maneuvers.
Do not allow the roll-up cover to snap back, as
otherwise it can be damaged.<

Driving tips

Controls

Roll-up cover

At a glance

3. To unlock the rear seat back, pull the corresponding lever in the luggage compartment.

Practical interior accessories

With larger cargo area
1. Fold over both rear backrests, refer to
Increasing cargo area.
2. Unlock the case on both sides with the buttons, arrow 1.

Reach into the recess and pull toward the front.
When you fold back the backrest, be sure
that the catch engages securely. The red
warning indicator disappears in the recess
when the catch is engaged. If it is not properly
engaged, transported cargo could enter the
passenger compartment during braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occupants.<

3. Pull out the case downward, arrow 2; avoid
tilting when doing so.

To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the safety belt information on
page 45.<

Separation net

4. Push the case into the guides on the back of
the seat backrests.
5. Carefully pull out the separation net and
insert it in the front brackets as described in
With normal cargo area. This is best carried
out from the front seat.
Do not allow the separation net to snap
back, otherwise there is a risk of injury
and the separation net may be damaged.<

With normal cargo area
Pull the separation net out of the case by the
loop. Grasp the rod on both sides and insert it in
the brackets, arrow 1. This is best carried out
from the rear seat.
When you no longer required the separation
net, grasp the rod on both sides and remove it
from the brackets, arrow 2. Then slowly allow
the separation net to glide into the case.

To restore the original state, proceed in the
reverse order. Finally, lay the case in the two
side brackets and then press forward until it
engages. The red warning indicator disappears
in the recess when the catch is engaged. Check
whether the case is properly locked in place by
pulling it with a sudden movement.

Compartment in floor
Automatic roll-up cover: the opened floor panel
strikes against the roll-up cover in the end position. If necessary, unhook the roll-up cover at
the rear before opening the floor panel.

118
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance
The floor panel flap can be locked.

Compartments in floor

> To open the front floor panel flap, pull
upward on the handle.
> To close the front floor panel flap, press
downward until it locks.

Before swinging down, return the hook to its
original position.

Storage area package*

Rear compartment:
To open, reach into the recess and swing up the
handle.
The rear floor panel flap can be locked.

Dividing up rear compartment

Retaining straps
You can unhook the right-hand retaining strap,
e.g. to open the side panel. To unhook at the
rear end, pull downward; to hook in, press it into
the opening. In addition, it can also be secured
in the center. This makes it possible to secure
objects of different sizes.

Hooks
Two hooks can be used to secure smaller
objects.

Fold out the partitions and press down.
Use the separation net, refer to page 118,
otherwise objects could be thrown

119
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation

Front compartment:

Communications Entertainment

1. Swing up the cover.

Mobility

Folding up spare tire cover

Reference

The partitions in the compartment can be rearranged.

2. Detach the hook from the bracket and hook
into the floor panel flap.

Controls

Press at bottom and fold out until they lock.

Driving tips

Opening: reach into the recess and swing up
the handle.

Practical interior accessories

around and endanger occupants, e.g. during
braking or evasive maneuvers.<

Securing cargo

Ski bag*
Designed for safe, clean transport of up to
4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6.9 ft/2.10 m. When skis of 6.9 ft/2.10 m
in length are loaded, the ski bag will tend to contract, reducing its overall capacity.

Loading
1. Fold down the center armrest, press the
button and open the cover.

After loading, secure the ski bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to
do so, it could endanger occupants during braking or evasive maneuvers.<
To store the ski bag, perform the above steps in
reverse order.

Removing ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to put it to other
uses.
2. Press the button again; the cover in the luggage compartment opens. If you press the
button firmly the first time, this also opens
the cover in the luggage compartment.
3. Extend the ski bag between the front seats
and fill it. The zipper facilitates access to the
stowed items and drying of the ski bag.
4. Insert the latch plate of the ski bag retaining
strap into the center safety belt buckle that
is marked CENTER.

1. Pull the handle forward and pull the ski bag
up and out.
2. Close the cover in the luggage compartment.
Your BMW center will be glad to provide
you with more detailed information on the
various items of equipment.<

Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.
120
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

121

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

At a glance

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving tips
This section is designed to provide you
with extra support by supplying information
useful in dealing with specific driving
and operating conditions.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. To ensure that your vehicle continues to provide optimized economy of operation
throughout an extended service life, we request
that you devote careful attention to the following section.

Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at changing engine and driving speeds,
however do not exceed 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/
160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kick-down mode during these
initial miles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Clutch
The function of the clutch is only at its optimized level after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement
Observe the break-in instructions again if components mentioned above must be replaced
after subsequent driving operation.

General driving notes
Closing luggage compartment lid/
tailgate
Operate the vehicle only when the luggage compartment lid/tailgate is completely closed. Otherwise, exhaust fumes could
enter the interior of the vehicle.<

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.

If special circumstances should make it absolutely necessary to operate the vehicle with the
luggage compartment lid/tailgate open:

SMG Sequential Manual Transmission

1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof or
panorama glass sunroof.

Do not use the acceleration assistant during the
break-in period, refer to page 63.

Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the
first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during
this break-in period.

2. Increase the air volume of the automatic climate control to a high level, refer to
page 107.

Hot exhaust system
As in all vehicles, extremely high temperatures are generated on the exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to
them. When driving, standing at idle and while
parking take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it
the risk of serious property damage as well as
personal injury.<

124
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

SMG Sequential Manual Transmission
Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold
the vehicle on a hill by pressing the accelerator, but apply the handbrake instead. Otherwise overheating can occur in the transmission
region.<

Starting assistant
The starting assistant enables you to start off
conveniently on slopes. The parking brake is
not required for this purpose.
This feature is controlled by two photocells in
the inside rearview mirror. One is integrated into
the glass of the mirror, while the other is located
at an offset position on the rear of the mirror
housing.
For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells
clean and do not cover the area between the
interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Do
not attach stickers of any kind to the windshield
in front of the mirror, either.

Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning, and is characterized by a partial or
complete loss of contact between the tires and
the road surface, ultimately undermining your
ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread
depth of the tires decreases, refer also to Minimum tire tread on page 201.

1. Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.
2. Release the footbrake and immediately
drive off quickly.
The starting assistant holds the vehicle
for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the
footbrake. Depending on the load, the vehicle
may also roll back slightly during this time.
After releasing the footbrake, immediately start
quickly, otherwise the starting assistant no
longer holds the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds
and it begins to roll back.<

Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. In situations that require it, it is best to
brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.

125
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips

On inclines, do not hold the vehicle with
the clutch; use the handbrake. Otherwise
greater clutch wear will result.<

Navigation

Using handbrake on inclines

Communications Entertainment

Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature*

Do not drive through water on the road if it
is deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only at
walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<

Mobility

BMW discourages the use of mobile
communications devices, e.g. mobile
phones, inside the vehicle without a direct connection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, the
vehicle electronics and mobile communication
device can influence one another. In addition,
there is no assurance that the radiation which
results from transmission will be dissipated
from the vehicle interior.<

Driving through water

Reference

Mobile communications devices in
vehicle

Things to remember when driving

Do not drive with your foot resting on the
brake pedal. Even light but consistent
pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures,
brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.

Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent pressure on the brake pedal
can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and
possibly even brake failure.<
The braking effect of the engine can be further
increased by downshifting, if necessary all the
way down into first gear. This strategy helps
you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake
system. For information on downshifting in the
manual mode of the automatic transmission,
refer to page 64.
Do not drive with the clutch depressed, in
idle or with the engine switched off, otherwise there will be no engine braking action or
support of the braking force and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area of movement
of the pedals and impair their operation.<

Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads

during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.

When vehicle is parked
Condensation forms in the air conditioner system during operation, and then exits under the
vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are therefore normal.

Before driving into a car wash
To prevent the exterior mirrors on this vehicle
from being damaged, always fold them in by
hand before entering an automatic car wash.
General information on the care and maintenance of your BMW is contained in the Caring
for your vehicle brochure.

Rear window wiper*
The rear window wiper can be damaged in car
washes. Take appropriate protective measures;
ask the car wash operator if necessary.

With comfort access and automatic
transmission
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock.
The engine can be switched off in the selector
lever position N. Also refer to page 40.

Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result
can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<

126
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard*:

The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage
can be transported.

Stowing cargo

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX lbs. or YYY kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.

> Load heavy cargo as far forward and as low
as possible, placing it directly behind the
seat back.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
opposite buckle.
> Do not pile objects higher than the top edge
of the backrest.

127
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.

Reference

The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX lbs. or YYY kg. Otherwise, this could
damage the vehicle and produce unstable
vehicle operating conditions.<

Controls

Load

Driving tips

Determining loading limit

Things to remember when driving

> Sports Wagon:
Use the separation net to protect the occupants, refer to page 118. Make sure that
objects cannot penetrate through the separation net.
Wrap sharp-edged or pointed objects
which could strike the rear window while
driving.

Securing cargo

hazard to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt
braking or evasive maneuvers.<

Roof-mounted luggage rack*
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Please comply with the precautions included with the installation instructions.

Mounting points

> Use the luggage net*, luggage straps, or
securing straps to hold down small and
lightweight luggage and cargo.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps* for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. Four lashing eyes
mounted in the luggage compartment or
cargo area are used to secure these heavyduty cargo straps, refer to illustration.
> Please observe the special instructions
supplied with the heavy-duty cargo straps.
Always position and secure the load as
described above. If you do not, it can
endanger the passengers during braking or
evasive maneuvers.
Use only the lashing eyes to secure heavy-duty
cargo straps, refer to illustration, otherwise the
cargo straps could become detached or the
vehicle could be damaged.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 229 ff., as excessive loads can pose a
safety hazard, and may also place you in violation of traffic safety laws.
You should never transport heavy or hard
objects unsecured in the passenger compartment, as they could fly around and pose a safety

The mounting points are located in the door
openings or on the roof rails*.

Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
its handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the specified weights under
Weights on page 229 ff.
The load on the roof must be evenly distributed
and must not extend outward beyond the limits
of the loading surface. Always stow the heaviest
pieces at the bottom. Be sure that adequate
clearance is maintained for raising the glass
sunroof, and that objects do not project into the
opening path of the luggage compartment lid/
tailgate.
Secure roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

128
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

129

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

At a glance

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Starting navigation system

Starting navigation system*
Your navigation system can use satellites to
ascertain the precise position of your vehicle
and guide you reliably to any destination you
enter.

Display in assistance window

Navigation DVD

1. Move the controller to the right to enter the
assistance window.

The navigation system requires a special navigation DVD. The latest version is available at
your BMW center.

You can display the route or the current position
in the assistance window. This display remains
visible even if you change to another application.

Inserting navigation DVD

2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select the desired route view or "Current
position".
1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled
side up. The DVD is automatically pulled in.
2. Allow several seconds for the system to
scan the data from the DVD.

Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is possible that it is blocked. A message appears on
the Control Display.

4. Press the controller.

132
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

In entering your destination you can select from
among the following options:

3. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

At a glance

Destination entry
> Entering a destination manually, see below

> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 140
> Selecting home address, refer to page 142
After selecting your destination you can proceed to start the destination guidance, refer to
page 144.

Operating navigation system
Enter data only when the vehicle is stationary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. If you do not observe this precaution, you may be in violation of the law, and can
endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.<

Entering a destination
manually
The system's word matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns, refer to page 143. This allows you to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored names can be
called up quickly.
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Navigation" is selected and
press the controller.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

133
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

2. Move the controller to the right to open
"Navigation".

Navigation

> Selecting destination from a list, refer to
Destination list, page 139

Communications Entertainment

> Selecting destination using information,
refer to page 138

Driving tips

Controls

> Entering destination via voice*, refer to
page 136

Destination entry

3. Select "Enter address" and press the controller.

In order to be able to start the destination guidance, at least the town/city of the destination or
its zip code must be entered.

Entering destination via town/city
name
1. Select "Town / City" or the displayed town/
city and press the controller.

The system also supports you with the following features:

2. Select the starting letter and press controller.
A list of all towns/cities starting with this letter appears on the Control Display.
3. To delete the letter entered if necessary:

> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of country and locality if the current entries should be retained
for your new destination.

Selecting country
1. Select "State / Province" or the displayed
country and press the controller.

> Delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select
, and press the controller.
> Delete all numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select
, and hold the controller
down.
4. If necessary, input more letters.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.

The list of available countries appears on
the display.

> Enter blank space if necessary:
Select the symbol and press the controller.

2. Select the country of destination and press
the controller.
134
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Entering street, house number and
intersection
After the street you can also enter the intersection or the house number.

At a glance

5. Change to the third field from the top if necessary. Turn the controller until the town or
city name is selected from the list and press
the controller.

1. Select "Street" or the displayed street and
press the controller.

1. Select "Town / City" and press the controller.
2. Enter the zip code:
Select the desired digits and press the controller.
The intersection is entered in the same way as
the street.

Entering a street without entering
destination

> Delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select
, and press the controller.

If a town/city has already been entered, you can
undo this entry. This may be practical if the
desired street does not exist in the entered destination, because, for example, it belongs to
another part of the town/city.

Mobility

> Delete all numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select
, and hold the controller
down.
3. Select the zip code and press the controller.
The corresponding destination is displayed.
4. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.

135
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

> Enter a blank space:
Select the symbol and press the controller.

You can also enter a street without entering a
destination. In this case all streets of the
entered country are offered for selection. The
related town/city is displayed after the street
name.

Communications Entertainment

Entering destination by zip code

Navigation

Driving tips

2. Enter the street.
The street is entered exactly like the destination.

Controls

Entering street and intersection

Destination entry

1. Change to upper field.
The arrow is selected.

Starting destination guidance with
manual destination entry

2. Turn the controller to the right until the
request for the entry of a street in the country appears and press the controller.

> Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.
Destination guidance starts immediately.
> If the destination guidance does not need to
be started immediately:
Select "Add to destination list" and press
the controller.
The destination is saved in the destination
list, refer to page 139.

3. Change to the second field from the top and
enter the street.

Entering house number
All house numbers stored for the street on the
navigation DVD can be entered.
1. Select "House number" and press the controller.
2. Enter the house number:
Select the desired digits and press the controller.
3. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until the house number
is selected and press the controller.

Entering destination via
voice*
In conjunction with the Professional navigation
system, you can enter the desired destination
via the voice input system. When entering the
destination, it is possible to change between
speech input and iDrive at any time. Reactivate
the speech input function for this purpose if
necessary.
With {Options} you can have the possible
commands read aloud.<
1. Press the
button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.
2. {Enter address}

136
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

1. Spell town/city name:
Say at least the first three letters of the
destination. The more letters you say,
the more exactly the system recognizes
the town/city.
The system can suggest up to 20 destinations that match your entries. Up to
6 entries are displayed at once on the Control Display.

Up to 4-digit house numbers can be entered.

Starting destination guidance
{Start guidance}
Destination guidance starts immediately.

Saving destination
The destination is added to the destination list
or can be saved in the address book.
{Add to destination list} or
{Add to address book}

Map-guided destination
selection
If you only know the location of the town or
street of the destination, then you can input the
destination by using a map. You can use the
cursor to select the destination on the map and
then adopt it into the destination guidance.

2. Select location:
Select {Yes}
or
Select other town/city:
{No}
Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
The following options are available:
{Next page}: additional entries of the
list are displayed.
{Repeat}: the town/city can be
respelled.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.

Mobility

A destination is suggested by the system.

At a glance

Say the house number.
Controls

To enter the destination, spell it using the
orthography of the country of destination.
Say the letters smoothly and at normal volume,
avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses.

To enter the house number:

Driving tips

Entering destination

The street is entered in the same way as the
destination.

Navigation

Say the name of the destination country in the
language of the voice input system.

Entering street and house number

Communications Entertainment

Say country of destination.

The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.

137
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Selecting country

Destination entry

3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.

> "Show destination position" places the
current destination in the center of the
map.
> "Return to map" changes back to the
"Input map".
>

Exit the menu.

A section of a map is displayed on the Control Display:
> During destination guidance, around the
current destination
> With the destination guidance deactivated, around the last destination
entered

7. Press the controller.
The map for the destination entry can also be
displayed in the map display:
Select the
symbol and press the controller.

Selecting destination using
information
You can obtain a display of selected destinations, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and adopt
them into the destination guidance.
4. Select destination with cursor.
> Changing scale: turn the controller.
> Moving map: move the controller in the
corresponding direction.
The controller can be moved to the left,
right, forward, backwards and also diagonally.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Information" and press the controller.

5. To apply or save the destination in the destination guidance system, press the controller.
The selected destination and other menu
items are displayed.
6. Select the desired menu item:
> "Start route guidance" starts destination
guidance.
> "Show current position" places the current position in the center of the map.

138
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving tips

Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

5. Press the controller.
6. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and restaurants", and press the controller.
These destinations are displayed on the
Control Display.
The last destination entered is the first item in
the destination list.
This symbol indicates the current destination during destination guide.
To display additional destinations from the destination list:
Turn the controller.
7. Select a destination and press the controller.
8. Select a menu item:
> To accept the address into the destination list and start the destination guidance:
Select "Select as destination" and press
the controller.

At a glance

> "On a new destination"

The last 20 entered destinations are shown in
the destination list. You can display these destinations and apply them in the destination guidance system.
For example, to plan a longer route, you can
store all destinations you want to drive to in
advance in the destination list, refer to Entering
a destination manually on page 133.

Applying destination in destination
guidance system
1. Select the desired destination and press
the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.

Navigation

> "On location"

Communications Entertainment

> "On destination"

Controls

Destination list

4. Select location:

> To establish a telephone connection:
Select "Call" and press the controller.

139
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

Destination entry

Editing destination list
1. Select the desired destination in the destination list and press the controller.
2. The selected destination can be edited:

1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.
2. Select "New address" and press the controller.

> Save entry:
Select "Add to address book".
> Display information on destination:
Select "Information on destination".
> Delete entry:
Select "Delete entry".
> Delete all entries:
Select "Delete list". The destination
guidance is switched off.
> Change entry:
Select "Edit". For operation, refer to
Entering destination via town/city name,
page 134.

3. Select "Enter address" and press the controller.
4. Enter name and address.

3. Press the controller.

5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
The entry is stored in the address book.

Address book

You can also save a destination from the destination list into the address book, refer to
page 139.

Opening address book
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.

Storing current position*
The current position can be adopted into the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "New address" is
selected and press the controller.

Select "Address book" and press the controller.

Storing destinations in address book
You can store approx. 100 destinations in the
address book.
3. Select "Use current location as address"
and press the controller.
The name given can be changed. For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 133.
140
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

You can also enter your current position into the
address book if you have left the sector covered
by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must
enter a name.

1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.
The stored entries appear on the Control
Display.

Controls

Selecting destinations from address
book

At a glance

3. Select "Edit address" and press the controller.

4. Change entry.
For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 133.

Deleting individual destinations from
address book

Driving tips

4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.

To start the destination guidance:
Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.

Deleting all destinations from address
book
1. Open the start menu.

1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.

Mobility

Changing destinations from address
book

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

141
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

3. Select "Delete address" and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

Navigation

1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.

Destination entry

4. Select "Delete data" and press the controller.

To change the entry:
1. Select "Home address" and press the controller.
2. Select "Edit address" and press the controller. For operation, refer to Entering a
destination manually, page 133.

Selecting route
5. Select "Delete address book" and press the
controller.
6. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Storing home address
You can save your current position or the current destination as the home address in the
address book. This entry occupies the second
position in the address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Home address" is
selected and press the controller.

You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like while
entering the destination and whenever the destination guidance is active.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The type of road is taken into account, e.g.
whether it is a highway or a winding road. The
road types are stored on the navigation DVD.
As a result, the routes recommended by the
navigation system may not always be the same
ones that you would choose based on personal
experience.

Changing route criteria
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Route preference"
is selected and press the controller.

3. Select "Use current location as address", or
"Save current destination" during the destination guidance, and press the controller.
To accept the home address as the destination:
1. Select "Home address" and press the controller.

The various criteria are listed on the Control
Display.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.

142
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

> "Short route"
Short route, irrespective of how fast or
slow progress will be
4. Press the controller.

Example:
Instead of "München", you can also enter
the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian
spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns
and streets the system will complete them
automatically as soon as enough letters are
available to ensure unambiguous identification.

The route criterion is highlighted.
5. If necessary, select an additional route criterion and then press the controller:

> The system only accepts name entries
beginning with letters that are stored on the
navigation DVD. The system will not accept
non existent names and addresses.

> "Avoid tollroads"
Tollroads are avoided where possible.
> "Avoid ferries"
Ferries are avoided where possible.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
The route criteria can also be changed in the
map view:
1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and
press the controller.

At a glance
Mobility

2. Select a route criterion and press the controller.

Controls

> Names of specific locations can also vary
from the official versions if you are using a
spelling that is customary in another country.

Driving tips

> "Fast route"
The short traveling time, being a combination of the shortest possible route and
the fastest roads

The system supports the word matching principle to make it easier for you to enter the names
of streets or towns. The system runs ongoing
checks, comparing your destination entries
with the data stored on the navigation DVD as
the basis for instant response. The user benefits include:

Navigation

> "Avoid highways"
Freeways are avoided where possible

Word matching principle

Communications Entertainment

> "With highways"
Freeways and major traffic arteries are
given priority

143
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

3. Select a route criterion for the route:

Destination guidance

Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance

Terminating/continuing
destination guidance

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.

In arrow or map display

1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Navigation" is selected and
press the controller.

Select the

symbol and press the controller.

2. Select a destination from the destination list
and press the controller or enter a new destination, refer to page 133.

In destination list
This symbol indicates the current destination.
1. Select the current destination and press the
controller.
3. Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.
After the route has been calculated, destination
guidance is indicated by arrows or a map display on the Control Display.
The destination guidance can also be started in
the arrow or map display:
Select the
symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, you can operate
other equipment using the iDrive at any time.
You will be punctually notified of a change of
direction by spoken instructions and the display
of the direction arrow.
144
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

When you park the vehicle before reaching the
entered destination, the following the question
is displayed before beginning the next trip:
"Continue guidance to destination?".

Selecting route criteria

Starting/ending destination guidance

Arrow to destination from a bird's eye view

From another menu, you can switch
directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items on
page 18.<

Distance to the next change of direction

Current position

Direction of travel
> Outline arrow:
Destination guidance on the calculated
route.

Displaying arrow display
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

> Solid arrow:
Arrow shows the route to be calculated
from a bird's eye view when the vehicle
is not located in an area contained on the
navigation DVD, e.g. in a multi-level
parking lot.

2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Arrow display" is
selected and press the controller.

Depending on the equipment, the estimated
time of arrival and the distance to the destination are displayed in the top or bottom line of the
Control Display.
Before a change in direction, the representation
of the arrow changes.
The arrow display is shown.

Street name for change of direction

Distance up to change of direction

Change of direction

145
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Driving tips

You have the option of displaying various views
of the route during destination guidance.

Navigation

Switching voice instructions on/off

Communications Entertainment

Mobility

Route display

Reference

To start the destination guidance:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Controls

The destination guidance starts automatically
after a short time.

Destination guidance

To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

>
>

Displaying map display
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until the desired map
view is selected:
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"

Changing map display

"Map facing north"
"Map direction of travel"
"Perspective"

Changing route criteria

Arrow to destination from a bird's eye view

The estimated time of arrival and the distance
to the destination are shown in the bottom line
of the Control Display.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you
have the option of deciding whether to orient
the map to north, toward your current direction
of travel, or show the map in perspective. At
scales of 250 miles/500 km or greater, the map
always points toward north.

Changing map display
Select the corresponding symbol and press the
controller.
The next map display is displayed.
3. Press the controller.

Changing scale
Turn the controller to adjust the scale.

Displaying towns/cities and streets of
route
You can have the roads and towns along the
route displayed during destination guidance.
The distances remaining to be traveled on each
individual road are also displayed.
1

Switching voice instructions on/off

Starting/ending destination guidance

Map-guided destination selection

Showing/hiding information last selected,
refer to Selecting destination using information on page 138

146
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

5. Select "Navigation voice instructions on"
and press the controller.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

Repeating and canceling voice
instructions

Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during the destination guidance in the arrow or
map view:
Select the
symbol and press the controller.
To switch the voice instructions on and off at
any time:

With the programmable buttons on the steering
wheel you can also make the following settings,
refer to page 53:
> Repeat the voice instruction:
Press button.
> Switch voice instructions on/off:
Hold the button down.

1. Open the start menu.

Setting volume of voice instructions

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

The volume can only be adjusted while a voice
instruction is being output.

3. Turn the controller until "Display settings"
is selected and press the controller.

147
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

The voice instructions are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use*.

Reference

Switching voice instructions on/off

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Destination guidance
through voice instructions

Driving tips

Controls

2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Route list" is
selected and press the controller.

4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.

At a glance

1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

Destination guidance

1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if necessary.
2. Turn the button during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.

To exit from the menu without changing the
route:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying current position
You can have your current position displayed
even when the destination guidance is
switched off.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

This volume is independent of the volume of the
audio sources.

2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Current position"
is selected and press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Bypassing route sections
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.

The current position of your BMW is displayed.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "New route" is
selected and press the controller.

If the navigation system is unable to identify a
town or city, your current map coordinates will
appear.
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
3. Turn the controller to enter the desired
number and press the controller.

You can also have the current position displayed on a map, refer to page 146.

The route is recalculated.

148
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

> the navigation system does not react to
entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes
about 10 minutes before the system is once
again operational.

At a glance
Controls

> you request the current position of your
vehicle, but do not receive a precise display?
The system is unable to receive enough
GPS signals at your current position due to
obstructions, your position is not yet available on your navigation DVD, or the system
is in the process of calculating your position. Reception is best when you have an
unobstructed view to the sky.

> the system stops furnishing directions on
which way to turn as you approach intersections?
You are driving in an area that has not yet
been completely recorded on the navigation DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a
turn, you will see an arrow which indicates
the general direction of your planned route.
Or you have left the recommended route
and the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new recommended route.

Navigation

> a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruction to insert the DVD appears on the Control Display?
The navigation DVD may not be the correct
DVD for the navigation system. This information is indicated on the DVD label.

Communications Entertainment

> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. Select a
destination that is as close as possible to
the original.
> the destination guidance does not accept
an address without the street name?
On the navigation DVD, no downtown area
can be determined for the city or town
entered. Enter any street, or a destination
such as the railway station in the selected
town, and then start the destination guidance.

Mobility

> you want to enter a destination for the destination guidance, but it is not possible to
select the letters for your desired entry?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this
case, the system will not offer you any letters to choose from. Select a destination
that is as close as possible to the original.

149
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

What to do if …

Driving tips

What to do if …

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Entertainment
Operation of the radio and CD
as well as their tone settings
are described in this chapter.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

On/off and tone

On/off and tone
The following audio sources have shared controls and setting options:

Entertainment sound output on/off, volume

> Professional radio* or
Business radio

> Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on, the last set radio
station or CD track is played.

> CD player

> Turn: adjust volume.

> CD changer*

2
3
4

Controls

Buttons in area of CD player
The layout of the buttons can vary depending
on your vehicle's equipment.
Single drive:

Station scan/track search
> Select track for CD player and
CD changer.

> Buttons in the area of the CD player
> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11

Eject CD
> Change radio station.

The audio sources can be operated using:
> iDrive

Drive for audio CDs

Drive for navigation DVDs

Operation via iDrive
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".

Two drives:
You have the following choices:
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception
> "WB": Weather Band station
> "SAT": satellite radio
> "CD": CD player or CD changer
> "Audio Aux": external audio device
> "Set": depending on the audio source,
other adjustments can be made, e.g. with
the radio: update station with strongest
reception, save station, tone control, sample stations.
152
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

Controls

3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press
the controller.

Switching on/off
In order to switch the Entertainment sound output on and off:
Press knob 1 next to the CD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indicates that sound output is switched off.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

Navigation

For a single drive, the sound output is available
for approx. 20 minutes with the ignition
switched off.
Switch on the sound output again for this purpose.

Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 next to the CD player until the
desired volume is set.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass, or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are set for all audio sources at
once.

At a glance

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

Driving tips

The selected audio source is stored for the
remote control currently in use.

Changing tone settings

The tone settings can also be selected when
you have opened "Entertainment" in the start
menu:
Select "Set" and then "Tone", and press the
controller.

Treble and bass
1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

From another menu, you can switch
directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items on
page 18.<

153
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

The settings are stored for the remote key currently in use.

On/off and tone

2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Treble" or "Bass".

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.

Balance and fader
You can adjust the volume distribution in the
same manner as "Treble / Bass".
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution

2. Turn controller:
The adjustment is applied; the field can be
changed.

Professional LOGIC7 HiFi System*
You can select a spatial sound effect that
improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency
ranges.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.

> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution

Speed-dependent volume control
The speed-dependent volume control automatically increases the volume with increasing
speed. You can set various stages for the
increase in volume.
1. Select "Speed volume" and press the controller.
2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".

3. Press the controller.
LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on.
To cancel the stereo effect:
Select "Off" and press the controller.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
154
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.

Driving tips

Controls

1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select the desired frequency range.

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.

Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
settings.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press
the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

155
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

5. Select "Reset" and press the controller.

Radio

Radio
Your radio provides reception the FM and AM
wavebands.

Changing stations

Listening to radio

Turn the controller.
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can have stations with another selection
criterion displayed.
Press the button if the sound output is switched
off.

Professional radio*

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.

You can choose from the following selection
criteria:

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

> "All stations":
Stations that can currently be received in
the "FM" waveband.

2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "FM" or "AM" is selected.

> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest received
signals in the "AM" waveband.
> "Presets":
Stations you have previously stored, refer to
page 158.

Business radio
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:

4. Press the controller.
Stations are shown on the Control Display on
the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Presets".

> "Autostore":
For the Station with the strongest signal,
refer to page 157.
> "Presets":
Stations you have previously stored, refer to
page 158.

If "Autostore" does not display any stations or if
the stations displayed can no longer be
received, to update the station with the strongest signal, refer to page 157.
156
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

1. Press the controller.

2. Turn the controller until the desired selection criterion is selected and press the controller.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
This cancels sampling of the stations, and the
radio remains on the current station.

Buttons next to CD player
To sample the stations, press and hold
the button for the corresponding direction.
To stop scanning, press the button again.

Selecting frequency manually
With "Manual" you can select stations that are
received in addition to those displayed.

3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.

Sampling stations, scan
The system automatically plays a brief sample
from each of the stations on the current waveband.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller to set a certain frequency.

Updating stations with best reception
For Professional radio with "AM" and with Business radio:
If you are on a longer journey and leave the
transmission range of the stations originally set,
you can update the list of stations with the best
reception.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
2. Change into the second field from the top.

Navigation

2. Change into the second field from the top.

Communications Entertainment

Press the
button for the corresponding
direction.
The system switches to the next displayed station.
You can also change stations with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.

Mobility

Buttons next to CD player

At a glance

1. Change into the second field from the top.

Controls

To end sampling:

Driving tips

Changing selection criteria

157
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

The stations are sampled.

Radio

3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.

3. Select the desired frequency or station.
"Set" is selected.

4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

5. Select "Store" and press the controller.

The display of the stations with the strongest
reception is updated. The frequencies of the
stations are displayed.

Storing stations

"Presets" is displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired memory position is selected.
7. Press the controller.
The station is stored.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until the desired selection criterion is selected and press the controller.

The channels of the last selection criterion are
displayed once again after a short time.
The stations are stored for the remote key currently in use.

158
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.

1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired station.
"Set" is selected.

At a glance

Changing a memory position

3. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
Controls

4. Select "Store" and press the controller.

2. Select "Favorites" and press the controller.

RDS Radio Data System
RDS transmits additional information in the
FM frequency range. If the reception conditions
are good, the station names are shown on the
Control Display. If the reception is weak or disrupted, it can take some time before the station
names are displayed.

Switching RDS on/off*
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.

The most frequently used stations are
shown at the beginning.

Navigation

1. Select "All stations" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.

Weather news flashes*
Weather Radio is a service of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)
of the US Department of Trade. Weather news
flashes are repeated every 4 to 6 minutes and
are routinely updated at intervals of 1 to
3 hours, and more often when necessary. Most
stations operate 24 hours a day. In case of a
storm, the National Weather Service interrupts
159

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Mobility

6. Press the controller.
The station is stored.

For the "All stations" selection criterion, you
can set whether the most frequently used stations are displayed at the beginning.

Reference

5. Turn the controller until the desired memory position is selected.
The number of the memory position
appears beside the name or frequency of
the station.

Communications Entertainment

Automatically sorting
stations*

Driving tips

RDS is activated.

Radio

the routine weather news and transmits special
warning messages instead. If you have a question about NOAA Weather Radio, please contact the nearest office of the National Weather
Service. Details are also provided on the Internet at www.nws.noaa.gov.

3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press
the controller.

Calling up weather news flashes
1. Select "WB" and press the controller.

4. Select "HD radio" and press the controller.

2. Select a station.
The station for weather news flashes may be
unavailable in some regions.
5. Select "Off" and press the controller.
The reception of digital stations is deactivated.

High Definition Radio*
Many stations transmit both analog and digital
signals. You can receive these stations digitally
and in improved sound quality.

This symbol is displayed when a sender is
being received digitally.

Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the

menu.
With some stations the digital signals are not
transmitted simultaneously with the analog signals. If you are in an area in which the selected
station is not continuously received digitally,
playback switches between analog and digital
reception. This can result in repetitions or interruptions. In this case it may be advisable to
deactivate digital radio reception.

160
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.

At a glance

With the digital stations, additional information
on the current track is displayed, e.g. the name
of the artist.
1. Select a station and press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

Controls

If you are on a longer journey and leave the
transmission range of the stations originally set,
you can update the list of stations with the best
reception.

Displaying additional information

The information is displayed.

Driving tips

Updating stations offering digital
reception

2. Change into the second field from the top.

Satellite radio*
You can receive over 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have this package enabled.
With this new technology the signal may
fail, causing interruptions in reception.<

The display of the stations offering digital
reception is updated. This can take up to 2 minutes.
161
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Communications Entertainment

" and press the con-

Mobility

5. Select "Autostore
troller.

If a digital station is received again when the
station is changed, the additional information
will be displayed again following a brief interruption.

Reference

4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.

Navigation

3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

Radio

Enabling or disabling channels

Disabling

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.

1. Select an enabled channel and press the
controller.

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Select "SAT".

2. Select "ESN" and press the controller.
The electronic serial number, ESN, is displayed.
The electronic serial number is
required for disabling.<
4. Press the controller.

3. To disable the channels:
Dial the phone number.

Selecting and storing channel
1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.

The channels are displayed.
These channels are enabled.

Enabling
1. Select a channel that has not yet been
enabled and press the controller.
A telephone number and the electronic
serial number, ESN, are displayed.

Channels are shown on the Control Display
sorted on the basis of selection criteria.

The electronic serial number is
required for enabling or disabling.<
2. To enable the channels:
Dial the phone number.

162
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

> "Presets":
Up to twelve channels you have stored
previously.

6. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
7. Select "Play" and press the controller.

At a glance

2. Select a menu item:

> "All channels":
All channels are displayed.

Additional information
The name of the channel and additional information on the current track are displayed, e.g.
the name of the artist.

4. If "Categories" has been selected:
Select the desired category and press the
controller.

Artist

Track

Storing channel
1. Select desired channel.
The channels of this category are displayed.

3. Select "Store" and press the controller.

Mobility

Select a channel marked with this symbol.

"Presets" is displayed.

163
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

3. Press the controller.

Driving tips

Controls

> "Categories":
All channels, sorted by categories, e.g.
news, jazz.

Radio

4. Turn the controller to select a memory location and press the controller.

The channel is stored. The channels of the last
selection criterion are displayed once again
after a short time.

Changing channel with buttons next to
CD player
Press the
button for the corresponding
direction.
The system switches to the next enabled channel.

Notes
If no signal can be received for more than 4 seconds, a message is displayed on the Control
Display.
Reception may not be possible for certain
reasons, e.g. environmental influences or
topographical conditions. The satellite radio
has no influence on this.
The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to tall buildings,
near trees, mountains or other sources of radio
interference.
Reception is usually possible again as soon as
the signal is available again.<

164
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Listening to CDs
Compressed audio files*

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.

Controls

CDs with compressed audio files, i.e. MP3, can
be played by the CD player, but not by the CD
changer.

At a glance

CD player and CD changer*

Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side
up. The CD is automatically pulled in.
Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. For CDs with compressed audio files,
it can take up to approx. 1 minute to read in the
data depending on the directory structure.
To start playback when there is already a CD in
the drive:
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.

Playback starts automatically if the sound output is switched on.

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

To eject the CD, press the button on the
CD player.
The CD emerges slightly from the drive.

2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".

CD changer: starting CD

Navigation

When equipped with two drives:
The upper drive is for audio CDs.

Communications Entertainment

4. On vehicles with a CD changer, change to
the second field from the top and turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.
The CD player is started.

Driving tips

CD player: starting CD

3. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.
165
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

2. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

Mobility

1. Fill the CD magazine and insert, refer to
page 169.

CD player and CD changer

5. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Turn the controller until the
desired CD, CD 1 - 6, is selected and press
the controller.

At the end of the last track, the next CD will be
selected.

Compressed audio files*
1. Select the directory if necessary and press
the controller.

2. Select the track and press the controller.

If new CDs have been placed in the CD magazine, playback starts with the lowest CD, e.g.
CD 1, track 1.
The CD magazine's load status is indicated on
the Control Display.

Selecting a track

3. Select "Play" and press the controller.

Buttons next to CD player
Press the
button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
The CD will start play at the start of the track.
The track is displayed on the Control Display.
You can also change the track with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Via iDrive
Select a track by turning the controller.

To change the directory:
Select the directory and press the controller.

166
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

Displaying information on track*

At a glance

To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

Controls

With compressed audio files, you can display
any information stored on the current track, e.g.
the name of the artist.
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

This cancels sampling of the tracks, and the
player remains on the current track.

Compressed audio files*
The information for the current track are displayed.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Sampling tracks, scan
The system automatically plays a brief sample
from each of the tracks on the current CD.

1. Select the current track and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To sample all tracks of the current directory, select "Scan directory" and press
the controller.
> To sample all tracks of the CD, select
"Scan all" and press the controller.

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.

To end sampling:

Navigation

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

1. Press the controller.

Driving tips

To end sampling:

This cancels sampling, and the player remains
on the current track.

167
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and
press the controller.

Mobility

1. Press the controller.

CD player and CD changer

Repeating a track
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.

Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To repeat the selected track, select
"Repeat track" and press the controller.
> To repeat all tracks of the current directory, select "Repeat directory" and press
the controller.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

To stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"
and press the controller.
The current track on the CD is repeated.
To stop repeating:
1. Press the controller again.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

Random play sequence
In this mode, the tracks on the current CD are
played once in a random sequence.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

168
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

2. Select the desired menu item:
> To play all tracks of the current directory
in random order, select "Random directory" and press the controller.

Inserting/removing CDs into/from
CD magazine
When inserting or removing CDs, remember to
hold them by their edges, taking care to avoid
touching the data side with its reflective CD
memory surface.

At a glance

1. Select the current track and press the controller.

Controls

Compressed audio files*

> To play all tracks of the CD in random
order, select "Random all" and press the
controller.
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all"
and press the controller.

CD magazine
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in
the glove compartment.

Removing CD magazine
To insert CDs into the CD magazine 1 or
remove them from it, you must first remove the
magazine from the CD changer:

Press button 2 to eject the CD magazine 1.
Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing in the
magazine again so that the inserted CDs can be
read in again.

Removing CDs:
Pull out the desired tray and remove the CD.

Inserting CD magazine

Push in the CD magazine as far as possible in
the direction of the arrow.
The CD changer automatically reads in the
loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.

169
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Communications Entertainment

button for the corre-

Mobility

Press and hold the
sponding direction.

Navigation

Buttons next to CD player:

Reference

Fast forward/reverse

Inserting CDs:
Insert one CD into each compartment of the
magazine with the labeled side up.

Driving tips

Stop random function:

CD player and CD changer

Notes

Damaged CDs/DVDs

BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat build-up and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, otherwise the CDs or the adapter can jam and may no
longer be ejected.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus,
otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<

General malfunctions

Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and moisture.
Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1227/50 6, high levels of humidity or direct
sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy protection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
can only be played to a limited extent.

Care
If necessary, clean the reflective scanning side
of the CDs/DVDs with a commercially available
cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from
the center outward.

BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been inserted correctly.

Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/
DVDs, one of the following factors may be the
cause.

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with selfrecorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent
data-creation or recording processes, or poor
quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a
pen intended for this purpose.

170
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

3. Select "Audio Aux" and press the controller.

Connecting

Power supply for your additional device:
Socket with removable cap

Connection for audio playback:
Jacks ε in/3.5 mm

Navigation

4. Adjust volume and sound if necessary.

Communications Entertainment

For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeakers, connect the headphone or Line-Out connection of the device to the connection 2.

Starting audio playback
The audio device must be switched on.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
button.

This opens the start menu.

Mobility

2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".

171
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

1. Press the

Driving tips

Controls

You can connect an external audio device, e.g.
an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehicle loudspeakers. The sound can be adjusted
with iDrive.

At a glance

External audio device

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Communications
This chapter summarizes how to operate your
mobile phone using iDrive or voice control and
how to use BMW Assist or TeleService.

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Telephoning

Telephoning*
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone
preparation package. After logging on a suitable
mobile phone on the vehicle once, you can
operate the mobile phone via iDrive, with the
buttons on the steering wheel and by voice.
A mobile phone that has been logged on once is
automatically detected again with the engine
running or the ignition switched on as soon as
it is in the vehicle interior. The logon data of up
to four mobile phones can be stored simultaneously. If several mobile phones are detected
simultaneously, the respective last mobile
phone logged on can be operated via the vehicle.

Using a phone in your vehicle
Using snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone
cradle, enables the battery to be charged and
the mobile phone to be connected to the external antenna of your vehicle. This ensures
improved network reception and a consistent
voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW center which mobile phones snap-in adapters are
offered for.
BMW discourages the use of mobile
phones or other mobile communications
devices inside the vehicle without a direct connection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, the
vehicle electronics and mobile communication
device can influence one another. In addition,
there is no assurance that the radiation which
results from transmission will be dissipated
from the vehicle interior.<
Avoid operating a mobile phone detected by
the vehicle with the keypad of the mobile
phone, otherwise malfunctions can occur.

For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emergency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate operating instructions for a
detailed description of safety precautions and
information, we request that you direct your
particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situation allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;
use the hands-free system instead. If you do
not observe this precaution, your being distracted can endanger vehicle occupants and
other road users.<

Suitable mobile phones
Ask your BMW center which mobile phones
with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the
mobile phone preparation package or which
mobile phones snap-in adapters are available
for. These mobile phones support the functions
described in this Owner's Manual with a certain
software version. Malfunctions can occur with
other mobile phones.

Care instructions
You can find what you need to know about caring for your mobile phone in the separate Caring
for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile
phone operating instructions.

Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone* using:
> The steering wheel, refer to page 11
> iDrive, refer to page 16
> Voice commands, refer to page 183

174
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

When the status information "Communication"
or "BMW Assist" is displayed in "BMW Service", only BMW Assist calls are possible.
It may not be possible to establish a telephone
connection using the mobile phone while a connection is being established to BMW Assist or
while a call to BMW Assist is already in
progress. If this happens, you must log off the
mobile phone from the vehicle if you wish to
place a call with the mobile phone.

2. Switch on the switch on ignition by pressing
the Start/Stop button without depressing
the brake or clutch pedal.

Preparation with iDrive
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
menu.

At a glance

1. Insert the remote control as far as possible
into the ignition lock.

Controls

You can use the car phone via the hands-free
system for BMW Assist calls.

Switching on ignition

button to open the start
Driving tips

Making calls with car phone:
BMW Assist calls

Commissioning

> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> The Bluetooth link on the vehicle, refer to
page 177, and on the mobile phone is
active.
> Depending on the mobile phone, presettings on the mobile phone are necessary:
e.g. via the menu item Bluetooth activated
or the menu item Connection not with confirmation.

2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

> For logging on, specify any desired number
as the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Bluetooth passkey is no longer required following successful logon.
> The ignition is switched on.
5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

175
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Only log on the mobile phone with the
vehicle stopped, otherwise the passengers and other road user can be endangered
due to a lack of attentiveness on the part of the
driver.<

Communications Entertainment

The following prerequisites must be met:

Navigation

Logging on mobile phone on vehicle

Telephoning

Preparation with mobile phone
6. Additional operations must be carried out
on the mobile phone and differ depending
on the model, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone, e.g. find, connect or link under Bluetooth device.

Logging on
Depending on your mobile phone, you will first
be requested consecutively via the display of
your mobile phone or the Control Display to
enter the Bluetooth passkey you specified.
Display on the Control Display if the Bluetooth
passkey can be entered with iDrive:
7. Select "Add device" and press the controller.

To cancel the logon of the mobile phone on the
vehicle:
Select "Refuse connection" and press the controller.
The next time you use the mobile phone in the
vehicle interior, it will be detected within a maximum of 2 minutes with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card or on your mobile phone are transferred to your vehicle, refer to the operating
instructions of your mobile phone if necessary.
This transfer is dependent on your mobile
phone, refer to the operating instructions of
your mobile phone if necessary, and can take
several minutes.
Up to four mobile phones can be logged on
consecutively. If you log on a fifth mobile phone,
the logon data of the last mobile phone in the
list will be deleted, refer to below.

List of logged-on mobile phones

8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, approx.
30 seconds are available for entering the
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and on the Control Display.

All mobile phones for which the vehicle has
stored the logon data can be displayed. If several logged-on mobile phones are detected by
the vehicle simultaneously, you can operate the
mobile phone highest up in the list via the vehicle.
You can change the order of the mobile phones
in the list. As long as a mobile phone is selected
in this list, the mobile phones cannot be operated via the vehicle.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
menu.

button to open the start

2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.

9. Select "Confirm passkey" and press the
controller.
10. Wait a few seconds until the list of the
logged-on mobile phones is shown on the
Control Display and "Phone" is selected.

3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

176
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

7. Select "Move device up" and press the controller.
The selected mobile phone is move upward
by one position.

7. Select "Delete device" and press the controller.
The logged-off mobile phone is deleted
from the list.
The phone book entries you have transferred from your mobile phone to your vehicle are also deleted in the process.

At a glance

6. Select the desired mobile phone and press
the controller.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
menu.

button to open the start

2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth technology is not approved in
all countries. Observe the applicable local
regulations. Temporarily disconnect the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and the mobile
phone if necessary.<
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot
operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and
other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be
used via the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop computer.
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between your vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. Remove the mobile phone from the snap-in
adapter and switch it off.
2. Press the
menu.

button to open the start

3. Select the menu and press the controller.
177
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

If you no longer want to operate your mobile
phone via the vehicle, you can delete the logon
data of the mobile phone.

Mobility

Logging mobile phone off vehicle

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

6. Select the desired mobile phone and press
the controller.

Telephoning

4. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions via
iDrive:
> Dial phone numbers.
> Dial phone numbers from the phone book.
> Dial stored phone numbers, e.g. from the
list of accepted calls.
6. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
The Bluetooth link is activated.
7. Select "Bluetooth communication active"
and press the controller to activate or deactivate the link.

> Hang up.
With the ignition switched off and radio readiness, e.g. after removing the remote control,
you can continue an ongoing call for a maximum
of 25 minutes via the handsfree system.

Requirements
The logon data of the mobile phone are stored
in the vehicle and the mobile phone is ready to
operate.
The engine is running or the ignition is switched
on.
The mobile phone is detected by the vehicle.

Adjusting volume

Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the

button.

This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to open "Communication".

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

178
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone number has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.

To delete an incorrect character:
Move the controller toward the right to
select
, and press the controller.
4. Select "Dial number" and press the controller.

At a glance

Receiving calls

Ending a call
Select "Accept" and press the controller.

1. Select the phone number and press the
controller.

Driving tips

Controls

Accepting a call

Select "Reject" and press the controller.
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.

Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "End call" and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Rejecting a call

Dialing a phone number from phone
book or a phone number stored in a list
Phone numbers you have called, incoming calls
and the entries of the phone book are stored in
lists when the mobile phone is connected to the
vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in
the phone book, the name of the entry is displayed instead of the phone number.
179

Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

3. Enter the desired phone number by dialing
the individual digits and pressing the controller.
Always enter the complete phone number
consisting of national dialing code, area
code, and phone number.
The letters correspond to the digits on the
keypad of the mobile phone.

Mobility

2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.

Telephoning

You can select the desired subscriber from the
list and establish the connection.
Five lists are available:
> "A - Z"
The entries of the mobile-phone phone
book, consisting of the name and phone
number, are sorted alphabetically.

3. To limit the number of displayed entries,
select the first letter of the desired entry and
press the controller.
4. Select the desired entry and press the controller.

> "Top 8"
The eight numbers called most frequently
from the phone book "A - Z" are automatically stored in the Top 8 list. The list is
sorted according to frequency.
> "Redial"
The last eight phone numbers you have
dialed are automatically stored. The last
number dialed is at the top of the list.
> "Missed calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight calls
which were not accepted are stored. This
requires the telephone number of the caller
to have been sent.
> "Received calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight
accepted calls are stored. This requires the
telephone number of the caller to have been
sent.

5. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
If different phone numbers are stored in the
mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and
home, the name is shown once for each phone
number.
You can change a phone number stored in the
phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. Select the desired entry and press the controller.

Dialing phone numbers from phone
book

4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.

The list "A - Z" is available for you phone book
entries. The phone book entries appear on the
Control Display.

6. Select "Dial number" and press the controller.

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

5. Change the phone number.

Dialing phone numbers stored in a list
To select an entry and establish a connection:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select list and press the controller:
> "Top 8"
> "Redial"
> "Missed calls"
> "Received calls"

2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.

180
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

1. Select an entry from the list and press the
controller.

3. Select the desired entry and press the controller.

3. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
The list is deleted.

Driving tips

Controls

2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the
controller.

At a glance

Deleting entire list

4. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.

> Roadside Assistance* of the BMW Group
when you require breakdown assistance

Deleting individual entries

> BMW center, e.g. when you want to make
an appointment for service

1. Select the desired entry from the list and
press the controller.
2. Select "Delete" and press the controller.
The entry is deleted.

> BMW Hotline* for information on all
aspects of your vehicle
If BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 188.
You can select the displayed service phone
number if your mobile phone is logged on in the
vehicle:
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

181
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

2. Move the controller forward to select
"Communication".

Communications Entertainment

If you are not activated for BMW Assist, you can
display several service phone numbers:

Navigation

BMW Contact*

Telephoning

3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the controller.

1. Establish connection.

2. Press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press
the controller.

3. Select "Keypad" and press the controller.
4. Select the desired character and press the
controller.
Each character is sent immediately and
confirmed by a tone depending the mobile
phone model.

5. Select one of the following menu items and
press the controller:
> "Roadside Assistance"
> "Customer Relations"
> "Service Request"
Contact is established.

Changing between mobile
phone and hands-free system

Transferring phone number via tone
dialing method

From mobile phone to handsfree
system

The tone dialing method is required for access
to network services or for controlling devices,
e.g. remote checking of an answering machine.

You can continue calls begun outside the Bluetooth range of the vehicle via the handsfree system when the motor is running or the ignition is
switched on. Depending on your mobile phone,
the system automatically switches over to the
handsfree mode.

6. Select "Call" and press the controller.

This function is available when a connection
has been established.

For mobile phones that do not automatically
switch over to the handsfree mode:
> Depending on the mobile phone model
used, the conversation can also be continued via the handsfree system if necessary.

182
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Operation by voice*
The concept
You can operate your mobile phone without
having to remove your hands from the steering
wheel. When making your entries, you will be
supported by announcements and questions in
many cases.

In dialogs where text is spoken, not a command,
e.g. a name, canceling is only possible using the
button on the steering wheel.

Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.
You can have the possible commands spoken
by the system at any point:
{Help}

Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
{Dial name} or {Name}.
The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.

At a glance
Controls

{Cancel}.

Driving tips

When you telephone via the handsfree system,
you can also continue the call via the mobile
phone if necessary, depending on the mobile
phone model. Act according to what is shown
on the mobile phone display, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone.

button on the steering wheel

Navigation

From handsfree system to mobile
phone

Press the
or

Communications Entertainment

> Press the
button above the storage
compartment. Switching over may take
several seconds.

Ending/canceling operation by voice

The same prerequisites as for operation via
iDrive apply, refer to page 178.

Symbols in Owner's Manual
{...}Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the system.

Voice commands
Activating system
1. Press the
button on the steering wheel.
An acoustic signal indicates that you can
say commands.

Mobility

2. Say the command.
The text or numbers that the voice command system has registered will appear on
the Control Display.

183
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

Reference

Act according to what is shown on the
mobile phone display, refer to the operating
instructions of your mobile phone.

Telephoning

Example: dialing phone numbers
Start the dialog:
Press the

button on the steering wheel.

Command

Response

{Dial number}

e.g. {123 456 7890}

Depending on equipment:
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or
{{123 456 7890. And next?}}

{Dial}

Adjusting volume

Correcting phone number

You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:

After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.

Deleting input
{Delete} is used to delete all the digits entered
so far.
Turn the button during an instruction to select
the desired volume.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. {Dial number}.
The dialog for establishing a telephone
connection is opened.

Voice phone book
Operating by voice command requires a personal voice phone book.
> On vehicles with combined drives for audio
CDs and navigation DVDs, the entries are
automatically adopted from your mobile
phone's memory.
> On vehicles with a single drive, the entries
must be entered by voice and are independent of your mobile phone's memory. In this
case, it is not possible to use voice command either to call phone numbers stored in
the mobile phone or to store new numbers.

2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dial}.
The connection to the desired subscriber is established.

3. Say the phone number when prompted.
4. To store the phone number:
{Save}.
Delete entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
1. {Delete name}.
The dialog for deleting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
Delete all entries:
{Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the
phone book.
1. {Delete phone book}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.

3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

Redialing

At a glance
Controls

2. Speak name and repeat entry upon
request.
The spoken length of the names in the
phone book must not exceed approx.
2 seconds.

2. Say the name when prompted.

The {Redial} command calls "Redial".

Notes
The commands in English were available
as of this printing. Other languages are
currently not available. To operate the mobile
phone via the voice command system, refer to
page 22.<

Important for voice commands
For voice commands, keep the following in
mind:
> Issue the commands smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis
and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof
closed to prevent interference from ambient noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.

2. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the repeated prompt with
{Yes}.
Have entries read aloud and select:

Mobility

You can have all the entries of your voice phone
book read aloud in the order of input and select
a certain entry to establish a connection:

Driving tips

1. {Save name}.
The dialog for storing a name is
opened.

1. {Dial name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.

Navigation

An entry always consists of a name and phone
number.

The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.

Communications Entertainment

Save entry:

Selecting an entry

1. {Read phone book}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is
read aloud.

Reference

Creating and editing voice phone
book*

Telephoning

Mounting/removing snap-in
adapter
1. Press the area 1 around the button and
remove the cover.

Inserting mobile phone
1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile
phone's antenna connector if necessary, so
that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. Push the mobile phone with the keys facing
upward toward the electrical connections
and press down until it engages.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and
press down until it engages.
The mobile phone's battery is charged from
radio readiness or with the steering unlocked.
To protect the vehicle's batteries, avoid
using the phone when the ignition is
switched off.<

Removing mobile phone
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press the area 1 around the button.

Press button.

BMW Assist
BMW Assist provides you with other services in
addition to TeleService. For example, the position data of your vehicle can be transferred to
the BMW Assist response center if an emergency call* has been initiated.
Many functions of BMW Assist depend on the
individually agreed contract. Data transmission,
e.g. of the CBS Condition Based Service, differs from country to country.
The contract of participation with BMW Assist
and the activation must be completed before
you can use BMW Assist.
When the contract expires, the car phone can
be deactivated by a BMW center without having
to visit a BMW center. Following deactivation of
the car phone, no emergency calls can be
made. The car phone can be reactivated after
signing a new contract with a BMW center.

> The installed car phone is logged on to a
cellular telephone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the services.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
This can be displayed on the Control Display.
> For TeleService or BMW Assist to be activated and updated, the GPS signal must be
available.
> For BMW Assist: you have applied to your
BMW center or BMW Customer Support for
BMW Assist.

Enabling TeleService or BMW Assist
For you to be able to use the services of
TeleService or BMW Assist, these must be
enabled.

Requirements
> Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
> Leave radio readiness switched on while
connecting to the system.

Enabling
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips

You can use TeleService or BMW Assist when
the following requirements are met:

Navigation

Requirements

Communications Entertainment

TeleService supports you when communicating with a BMW center. The built-in car phone
can be used to transmit data regarding the service status of your vehicle or regarding legally
mandated inspections directly to your BMW
center. This is the same data that is also stored
for CBS Condition Based Service in the remove
control. Your BMW center can then contact
you, and you can make an appointment that
suits you while you are still on the road. Your
advantage here is that your BMW center can
prepare in advance for the required maintenance work. The TeleService functions are
country-specific: the data regarding the service
status of your vehicle or regarding legally mandated inspections is transmitted on a countryspecific basis either automatically before they
fall due or during your calls to the BMW center.
Your BMW center will be glad to provide more
detailed information.

You can also use the services of BMW Assist via
the Internet. The range of services is continually
being expanded.

Mobility

TeleService

Reference

TeleService* , BMW Assist*

TeleService, BMW Assist

3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.

Services offered
The following special features apply for the services of TeleService and BMW Assist:
> The services offered are country-specific.
> Voice contact is established or data are
transferred, depending on the equipment
and the country. In some countries, it is
possible to do both.
> The data transferred can be the vehicle
data, your current position or the data of the
CBS Condition Based Service.

5. Select "Service Status" and press the controller.

Automatic service notification*
The data on the service status of your vehicle or
on legally mandated inspections is transmitted
automatically directly to your BMW center prior
to the due date. You can check when the BMW
center was notified.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

6. Select "Enable services" and press the controller.
TeleService and, if applicable, BMW Assist
are enabled; data exchange with the service
center starts.

4. Select "Service requirements" and press
the controller.

Enabling takes a few minutes. The status is displayed on the Control Display. If you open
another menu, the enable process continue to
run in the background.

At a glance

5. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press
the controller.

You can call Roadside Assistance* of the
BMW Group should you require help in the
event of a breakdown.

6. Select "Start service" and press the controller.

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.

Contact to Roadside Assistance will be established.

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select
"Communication".
3. Select "BMW Assist" and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service" and press the controller.

Setting up contact to your BMW center
or BMW Customer Relations
You can contact your BMW center, e.g. to
arrange a service appointment.
For information related to your vehicle, call the
BMW Customer Relations.
This requires your mobile phone to be logged
on in the vehicle.
iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

Reference

Mobility

4. Select "BMW Service" and press the controller.

Navigation

If the current position can be determined,
the current vehicle location is displayed.

Communications Entertainment

Breakdown assistance

Driving tips

Controls

5. Select "Service notification" and press the
controller.

TeleService, BMW Assist

5. Select desired BMW service:

6. Select "Options" and press the controller.

> "Service Request"
> "Customer Relations"

7. Select "Update services" and press the
controller.
6. Press the controller.
7. Select "Start service" and press the controller.
Contact to the desired BMW service will be
established.

Adapting TeleService or
BMW Assist
Displaying and updating services
If the offering from TeleService or BMW Assist
changes, you will be notified. In this case you
should update the services.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Service Status" and press the controller.
The current services available from
TeleService or BMW Assist are displayed.

Blocking services*
If you block the services, the connection to
BMW Assist is deactivated.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Service Status" and press the controller.
6. Select "Options" and press the controller.
7. Select "Terminate services" and press the
controller.
The use of TeleService or BMW Assist is
blocked, and the current vehicle position will
not be transferred during an emergency call*.
To deactivate the blocking function, enabling
must be carried out again, refer to page 187.
This does not affect the contractual agreements.
Enable TeleService and, if applicable,
BMW Assist once again to log on again.

At a glance

Displaying vehicle data
When TeleService or BMW Assist is activated,
the license plate and the vehicle identification
number of your vehicle can be displayed.
1. Open the start menu.

Controls

2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.

Navigation

Driving tips

5. Select "Profile" and press the controller.

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

To adjust the license plate number, please contact your BMW center.

Mobility
This section helps you maintain your
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
breakdown assistance.

Refueling

Refueling
Always switch off the engine before refueling, otherwise no fuel can be filled into
the tank and a message is displayed.<

3. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.

When handling fuel, always observe all
applicable precautionary measures and
regulations. Never transport reserve fuel containers in the vehicle. These could become
leaky and cause an explosion or a fire in an accident.<

Fuel filler door

Sports Wagon
1. Unhook the retaining strap*, refer to
page 119.
2. Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo
area.
3. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.

To open and close: press the rear edge of the
fuel filler door.

Manual release
If an electrical malfunction should occur, you
can unlock the fuel filler door manually.

Sedan
1. In the luggage compartment, raise the floor
mat and the cover located beneath it.

Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels always observe any
safety guidelines posted at the service
station.<

2. Open the snap fasteners of the right side
panel and take off the side panel.

Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler door.
194
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.

Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 18.5 gallons/70 liters, including the
reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 gallons/8 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<

Fuel filler cap
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
drivability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<

At a glance
Communications Entertainment

Do not jam the strap attached to the fuel
filler cap between the fuel filler cap and
the vehicle. A message* is displayed if the cap
is loose or missing.<

Controls

> a reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor
recovery system.

Field experience has indicated significant differences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10% ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight,
that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an
equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void
the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.

Driving tips

> premature pump shutoff

Use high-quality brands

Navigation

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler
nozzle during refueling, as otherwise this leads
to

Fuel specifications
Do not use leaded gasoline, otherwise
permanent damage to the catalytic converter will result.<

Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91
This gasoline is highly recommended.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no affect on the engine life.

Reference

Mobility

However, you may also use gasoline with less
AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is 87.

Wheels and tires

Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Information for your safety
The condition of the tires and the maintenance
of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only
to the tire's service life, but also to driving comfort and most importantly, driving safety.

Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it as needed, even on the
compact tire*: at least twice a month and before
starting long trips. Otherwise driving instability
or tire damage, and therefore accidents, can
result from incorrect tire inflation pressures.
Do not drive with depressurized, i.e. flat tires,
except run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously
impair your vehicle's handling and braking
response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can
lead to a loss of control over the vehicle.<
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 90, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 92.<

Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes and tire brands respectively
approved and recommended by BMW; a list of
these is available from your BMW center.<

For correct identification of the right tire inflation pressure for your tires, observe the following:
> Tire sizes of your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for speeds
up to 100 mph/160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column Traveling speeds up to max. 100 mph/
160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.
These pressure specifications can be found on
the door post when you open the driver's door.

The permissible top speed for these tire
inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.
Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire damage and accidents may result.<

Tire inflation pressures for speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please
observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures
for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from
the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could
occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the law could
occur.

At a glance

Compact wheel*:
T 135/80 R 17 102 M

61/420
Traveling speeds
up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 17 95 W
225/55 R 16 95 H M+S
245/45 R 17 99 V M+S XL

29/200

33/230

29/200

33/230

35/240

42/290

225/50 R 17 94 V M+S
225/50 R 17 94 W
245/40 R 18 93 W
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S

29/200

36/250

29/200

35/240

36/250

44/300

Front: 245/40 R 18 93 W
Rear: 275/35 R 18 95 W

29/200

33/230

29/200

33/230

36/250

42/290

Front: 245/35 R 19 93 Y XL
Rear: 275/30 R 19 96 Y XL

30/210

38/260

29/200

33/230

35/240

42/290

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 229.

Controls

Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Driving tips

Tire size

Navigation

525i/530i

Wheels and tires

525xi/530xi
Tire size

Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Compact wheel*:
T 135/80 R 17 102 M

61/420
Traveling speeds
up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 17 95 W
245/45 R 17 99 V M+S XL

29/200

35/240

29/200

33/230

35/240

42/290

225/50 R 17 94 V M+S
225/50 R 17 94 W
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S

30/210

36/250

30/210

36/250

38/260

45/310

245/40 R 18 93 W

30/210

38/260

30/210

36/250

38/260

45/310

Front: 245/40 R 18 93 W
Rear: 275/35 R 18 95 W

30/210

35/240

30/210

33/230

38/260

42/290

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 229.

530xi Sports Wagon
Tire size

Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Compact wheel*:
T 135/80 R 17 102 M

61/420
Traveling speeds
up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 W M+S
225/50 R 17 94 W
245/45 R 17 95 W
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S
245/45 R 17 99 V M+S XL

30/210

38/260

32/220

39/270

38/260

45/310

245/40 R 18 93 Y

32/220

39/270

29/200

36/250

35/240

42/290

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 229.

Traveling speeds
up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

At a glance

Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/40 R 18 93 Y

30/210

38/260

29/200

35/240

33/230

41/280

245/45 R 17 95 W
245/45 R 17 99 V M+S XL

29/200

35/240

32/220

38/260

36/250

44/300

225/50 R 17 94 V M+S
225/50 R 17 94 W
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S

29/200

36/250

33/230

39/270

38/260

45/310

Front: 245/40 R 18 93 Y
Rear: 275/35 R 18 95 Y

30/210

35/240

29/200

32/220

33/230

38/260

Front: 245/35 R 19 93 Y XL
Rear: 275/30 R 19 96 Y XL

35/240

39/270

33/230

38/260

44/300

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 229.

Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.

Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h

Tire size
e.g.

Speed letter

W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
225/50 R 17 94 W

Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Belted construction – radial
Rim diameter in inches
Carrying capacity ID-code
(not in ZR tires)
Speed code letter
(in ZR tires before the R)

Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
e.g.

DOT xxxx xxx 0806

Manufacturer code
for tire make
Tire size and tire design
Tire age

Mobility

Tire identification marks

Controls

61/420

Driving tips

Compact wheel*:
T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Navigation

Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Reference

Tire size

Communications Entertainment

550i

Wheels and tires

Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT... 0806 indicates that the
tire was manufactured in week 8 of 2006.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<

Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.<

Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<

RSC – run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 201.

M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than summer tires.

XL
Indicates specially reinforced tires.

Wear indicators at the tread-groove base, refer
to arrow, are distributed over the tire's circumference and are marked on the side of the tire
with TWI – Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread
has been driven down to the wear indicators, a
tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been
reached.

Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more susceptible to road hazards and consequential damages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for example, be caused by driving over curbs. These
kinds of problems may also be signaled by other
changes in vehicle response, such as a strong
tendency to pull to the left or right.

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips

Run-flat tires*

You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire.
Run-flat tires consist of partially self-contained
tires and special rims. The sidewall reinforcement ensures that the tire retains some residual
safety in the event of pressure drop and driving
remains possible to a restricted degree.
To continue driving with a damaged tire:
> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of
a flat tire page 90
> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Message with low tire inflation pressure page 92

New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only
by your BMW center or tire shop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel. If this
work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.<

Navigation

The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legislation only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. For the sake of
safety, new tires should be installed.

Communications Entertainment

Minimum tread depth

Mobility

Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.

In these cases, reduce speed immediately and have wheels and tires thoroughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW center or tire shop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If necessary,
have the vehicle towed there. Tire damage can
be extremely dangerous for vehicle occupants
and other road users.<

Reference

Tire condition

Wheels and tires

Retreaded tires

Recommended tire brands

BMW does not recommend that you use
retreaded tires, as driving safety may be
impaired. The causes for this include the possibly different tire casing structures and the often
wide variations in their age, which can result in a
limited service life.<

The right wheels and tires
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufacturing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions than the
approved units – these differences could lead to
body contact, and with it the risk of severe accidents. If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot be held liable for driving
safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire combination at your BMW center.
The correct wheel/tire combination also affects
various systems whose function would otherwise be impaired, e.g. ABS, DSC or xDrive.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer. Following
tire damage, have the original wheel and tire
combination remounted on the vehicle as soon
as possible.

Wheels with electronics for
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or converting from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics, as otherwise the
Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire,
refer to page 91. Your BMW center will be
happy to advise you on this subject.

Certain tire makes are recommended by BMW
depending on the tire size. You can recognize
these from the clearly visible BMW marking on
the tire sidewall.
When used properly, these tires comply with
the most demanding standards for safety and
vehicle response.

Run-flat tires
When mounting new tires, or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat
tires for your own safety. In addition, no spare
tire is available in case of a flat tire. Your BMW
center will be glad to advise you.
For safety reasons, BMW recommends
that you do not have damaged run-flat
tires repaired; they should be replaced.<

Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold
winter driving conditions. Although all-season
M+S tires provide better winter traction than
summer tires, they generally fail to provide the
same levels of cold-weather performance as
winter tires.

Pay attention to speed
Always observe the maximum permissible speed for the winter tires, otherwise
tire damage may occur, which can result in accidents.<

Storage
Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
202
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 012 211 - © 02/06 BMW AG

At a glance

grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum
tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall
of the tire.

Snow chains*
Controls

BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains,
classifies them as road-safe and recommends
them. Consult your BMW center for more information.

Driving tips

Use is only permissible in pairs on the rear
wheels.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

After mounting snow chains, do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, otherwise
incorrect displays can occur.
When driving with snow chains, it may be practical to briefly activate DTC, refer to page 87.<

Under the hood

Under the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without
the required professional technical training.
If you do not know what repair procedures to
follow, have work on your vehicle done only by
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is
not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<

Closing

Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.

Hood

Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.
If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving your vehicle, you
should stop at once and close it securely.<

Releasing

Pull lever.

Opening

Press the release handle and open the hood.

Brake fluid reservoir, located beneath the
microfilter cover

Starting-aid terminal, refer to page 220

At a glance
4

Washer fluid reservoir of the headlamp
and windshield cleaning systems, refer to
page 66

Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 207

Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.

Checking engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil
level check.

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

Mobility

The condition for the most accurate indication
of the oil level possible is measurement with the
engine at operating temperature, i.e. following
an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km.
You can display the oil level on the Control Display while driving or when stopped on a level
surface with the engine running.

Communications Entertainment

Filler neck for engine oil, refer to
Adding engine oil

iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to
page 16.

Reference

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

Engine compartment

Under the hood

4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.

5. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Turn the controller until "Engine
oil level" is selected and press the controller. The oil level is displayed.

Possible messages
> "Engine oil level O.K."
> "No measured value available: Updating
engine oil level measurement...":
Engine oil level is being measured. This
process can take approx. 3 minutes when
stopped on a level surface and approx.
5 minutes while driving.
> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart
of engine oil.":
Add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil at the next
opportunity.
> "Engine oil level too high":
Have the vehicle checked immediately, otherwise engine damage may
result if too much oil has been added.<
> "Please observe recalculated service interval for engine oil":
Do not add engine oil. Continued driving is
possible. To do this, observe the recalculated remaining mileage until the next oil
change service, refer to page 209. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil

Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of oil until a corresponding message is shown on the Control Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be damaged.<
Continuous exposure to used oil has
caused cancer in laboratory testing.
For this reason, any skin areas that come into
contact with oil should be thoroughly washed
with soap and water.
Keep oil, grease etc. out of reach of children and
observe the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.<

Oil change
Have oil changed only at your BMW center or
at a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.

Approved engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves specific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Do not use oil additives, as these may
result in engine damage.<
Only use approved BMW High Performance
Synthetic Oil.
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is
unavailable, you can add small quantities of
other synthetic oils between oil changes. Only
use oils of the specification API SH or higher.

3. The coolant level is correct when the coolant level is between the MIN and MAX
marks, refer to the diagram adjacent to the
filler neck.

At a glance

Your BMW center will be happy to answer
detailed questions on BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic
oils.<

Viscosity grades
Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and
is specified in SAE grades.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level – do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

Coolant

Brake system

Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<

Malfunctions

Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. The additives
present a health hazard; observe the instructions on the containers.<
Comply with the appropriate environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant additives.<

Checking coolant level
1. The engine must be at ambient temperature.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to
open.

Brake fluid
The warning lamp lights red up in spite
of the handbrake being released; a
message is shown on the Control Display: stop immediately.
The brake fluid in the reservoir has fallen to
below the minimum level. At the same time, a
considerably longer brake pedal travel may be
noticeable. Have the system thoroughly
checked.
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
When you continue driving, an increased
brake pedal path can be necessary, and
significantly longer braking distances might be
required. Please adapt your driving style
accordingly.<

Communications Entertainment

Coolant is comprised of water and coolant additive. Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for your BMW. Ask your BMW center
for suitable additives.

Navigation

These oils can be used for driving at all outside
temperatures.

Mobility

Approved oils belong to the SAE grades
5W-40 and 5W-30.<

Reference

The choice of the right SAE grade is based on
the climatic conditions in the region in which
you normally drive your BMW.

Driving tips

Controls

You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.

Under the hood

Brake pads
The warning lamp lights red up in spite
of the handbrake being released; a
message is shown on the Control Display. The brake pads have reached their minimum pad thickness. Have brake pads replaced
immediately.
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
For your own safety: use only brake pads
that BMW has approved for the corresponding vehicle model. As BMW cannot
assess the suitability of other brake pads for
use on your vehicle, we are unable to assume
continued responsibility for the vehicle's operating safety if non-approved pads are
installed.<

At a glance

Maintenance
BMW maintenance system

> Vehicle check

Should the day come when you decide to sell
your BMW, a complete dealer service history
will prove to be an asset of inestimable value.

Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models

CBS Condition Based Service

Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service requirements.

Sensors and special algorithms take the different driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
You can set the Control Display to show
remaining distances and times of selected
maintenance intervals and legally mandated
deadlines, refer to page 77:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads, front and rear separately

BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service procedures are confirmed by entries in your vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the specified regular maintenance.<

> Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

Driving tips
Navigation

Make sure the date is always set correctly, refer to page 83, as otherwise the
effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service
is not ensured.<

Communications Entertainment

The BMW maintenance system supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The service schedule also
includes operations related to the vehicle's
comfort and convenience features, such as
replacement of the filters for the inside air.
The ultimate objective is to ensure economical
maintenance by providing the ideal service for
your vehicle.

Your vehicle stores the information required
maintenance continuously in the remote control during driving. After accessing the data
stored in the remote control, your BMW Service
Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of
service procedures for your own individual vehicle. You should therefore hand over the remote
control you last used to drive to the BMW Service Advisor when you take your vehicle in for
service.

Mobility

Service data in remote control

Controls

> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations

Reference

> Brake fluid

Maintenance

Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnostics interface

Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or several measuring and diagnosis modules, or with
a device for recording or transmitting certain
vehicle data or information. If you have also
signed a contract of participation for BMW
Assist, certain vehicle data can be transmitted
or recorded to enable corresponding services.

Care
Components which are decisive for the
exhaust-gas composition can be checked via
the OBD socket with a device.

Important information on the care and maintenance of your BMW is contained in the Caring
for your vehicle brochure.

This socket is located to the left on the driver's
side, on the underside of the instrument panel
under a cover.

Exhaust-gas values
The warning lamp lights up. The
exhaust-gas values worsen. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction in Canadian models.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In
this case you should reduce speed and drive to
the nearest BMW center as soon as possible.
Heavy engine misfiring led to serious damage
to the emission-relevant components, especially the catalytic converter, within a short time.
If the fuel filler cap is not properly tightened, the OBD system can close when
fuel vapor escapes. Then a display light up. If
the cap is then tightened, the display will go out
within a few days.<

Wiper blade replacement

Sedan

Front

The onboard toolkit is located in the luggage
compartment lid.

1. Fold the wiper arm out and grasp firmly.

3. Mount the new wiper blade and slide in until
it is heard to engage.

Rear*

The onboard toolkit is located in the left side
panel of the cargo area.
1. Lift off the wiper arm completely and pull off
the wiper blade, refer to arrow.

Reference

Mobility

2. Mount the new wiper blade and press on
until it is heard to engage.

Navigation

Sports Wagon

2. Press the safety tabs together while sliding
the wiper blade toward the front to disengage it.

Communications Entertainment

Loosen the wing nut to open.

Driving tips

Controls

Onboard toolkit

At a glance

Replacing components

Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. You must be duly diligent
in replacing them. BMW recommends having
your BMW center perform any work that you do
not feel competent to perform yourself or that is
not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its
metal socket.<
A selection of replacement bulbs is available at
your BMW center.
Whenever you perform any work on the
electrical system, turn off the consumers
involved to prevent short circuits from occurring. To avoid possible injury or equipment
damage when replacing bulbs, observe any
instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.<

Cover cap for low beams

Cover cap for high beams

Turn the cover cap to the left and remove.
Always wear gloves and eye protection –
the atmosphere within the H7 bulb is
pressurized. Otherwise there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is accidentally damaged during
replacement.<

Low beams
H7 bulb, 55 watts
1. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.

For care and maintenance of the headlamps,
please follow the instructions in the separate
Caring for your vehicle brochure.
For bulbs for which changing is not
described, and for checking and adjusting
headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center.<

Light-emitting diodes LEDs
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translucent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 lightemitting diodes.

2. Remove and replace the bulb.

High beams
H7 bulb, 55 watts
1. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.

Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several
hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<

Halogen headlamps
The illustration shows the left-hand side of the
engine compartment.

Parking and roadside parking lamps
Bulb 5 watts, W 5 W

Turn signals, front
Bulb 21 watts, PY 21 W
1. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.

At a glance

2. Remove and replace the bulb.

One bulb each is located above the low beams
and high beams.

2. Pull out the bulb holder.

2. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replacement.

Side-mounted turn signals

Driving tips

Controls

1. Turn the cover cap for low beams or high
beams to the left and remove.

Xenon lamps*

1. Press back against the front edge of the
light with the tip of your finger, then pivot it
out.

The service life of these bulbs is very long and
the probability of a failure is very low, provided
that they are not switched on and off an unusual
number of times. If one of these bulbs should
nevertheless fail, it is possible to continue driving with great caution using the fog lamps, provided traffic laws in your area do not prohibit
this.

Parking and roadside parking lamps
In the event of a malfunction, please go to your
BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.
3. Remove the bulb for replacement.

Side marker lamps, front and rear
To replace, please go to your BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Mobility

Have work on the Xenon lighting system
performed only by your BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Due to the high voltage present in the
system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when
work is carried out improperly.<

Communications Entertainment

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Navigation

Bulb 5 watts, W 5 W

Tail lamps
Sedan
> Backup lamps: bulb 16 watts, W 16 W
213

Reference

> Turn signals: bulb 21 watts, PY 21 W

Replacing components

> Other lamps: bulb 21 watts, P 21 W

Center brake lamp
This lamp uses LED technology for operation.
In the event of a malfunction, please go to your
BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Fender-mounted lamps
Sedan
The illustration shows the left-hand side of the
luggage compartment.

Turn signal

Tail lamp and brake lamp

All the bulbs are integrated into a central bulb
fitting.

Backup lamp

1. Lift up floor mat.

Reflector

Roadside parking lamp, tail lamp and
brake lamp

2. Undo the quick-release fasteners of the
side panel and pull out the panel.

Sports Wagon

3. Press together the two clips at the top and
bottom on the bulb fitting and remove the
bulb fitting.

> Turn signals: bulb 21 watts, PY 21 W
> Backup lamp and brake lamp 3:
bulb 16 watts, W 16 W
> Other lamps: bulb 21 watts, P 21 W

4. Backup lamps:
Remove and replace the bulb.
Other lamps:
Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replacement.

Turn signal

Tail lamp and brake lamp

Brake lamp

Sports Wagon

Backup lamp

Reflector

1. Right side: unhook the retaining strap*,
refer to page 119.

Roadside parking lamp, tail lamp and
brake lamp

2. Open the side panel.
3. Turn the bulb socket to the left and remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replacement.

What you will need

2. Remove the lamp and replace the bulb.

To avoid rattling noises later on, note the positions of the tools before removing them, then
return them to their initial positions after completing work.

In the event of a malfunction, please go to your
BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Changing wheels
Safety precautions in the event of a flat
tire or wheel change: park the vehicle as
far as possible from passing traffic and on solid
ground. Switch on the hazard warning flashers.
Lock the steering wheel in straight-ahead setting of the wheels. Apply the handbrake and
engage first gear, reverse gear or selector lever
position P.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
If a warning triangle* or portable hazard warning
lamp is required, set it up on the roadside at an
appropriate distance from the rear of the vehicle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

At a glance
Controls
Navigation

Sports Wagon:
Backup lamp

Driving tips

1. Insert screwdriver into the slot and press to
the right, refer to arrows. This releases the
lamp.

Chock*

Vehicle jack*

Lug wrench*

The tools are located in the mount under the
floor mat or floor panel flap.
1. Lift up floor mat or floor panel flap and cover
located beneath it.
2. Take out the required tools.

Communications Entertainment

Bulb 5 watts, C 5 W

3. After using the tools, return then to the storage space.
With run-flat tires, no tools are provided
for wheel changes. They can be purchased as accessories at your BMW center.<

Mobility

License plate lamp

Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface
which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack
could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the
vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as
snow, ice, tiles, etc.
Position the jack on a firm support surface.
Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a
support base for the jack, as this would prevent
it from extending to its full support height and
reduce its load-carrying capacity.
To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under
the vehicle, and never start the engine while it is
supported by the jack.<

Reference

Lamps in luggage compartment lid

Replacing components

Sports Wagon: removing and installing
floor panel flap of storage area package

8. Take out the cross support upward.

1. Unhook the roll-up cover at the rear.
2. Raise the floor panel flap.
3. Unhook the two catch straps at the top.

When installing the floor panel flap, proceed in
the reverse order and press down the hinge
covers.

4. Unlock the gas spring strut, refer to arrow,
and remove.

Compact wheel*

1. Unscrew the wing nut 1.
5. Fold over the floor panel flap toward the
front to release it and remove.

2. Remove the washer 2 laterally.
3. Take out the tool mounts 3.
4. Remove the compact wheel.

Preparing wheel change
1. Observe the safety precautions above.

6. Open the front floor panel flap.
7. Swing up the spare tire cover and hook the
hooks into the upper frame of the tailgate
opening.

2. Prevent the vehicle from rolling:
Place the chock behind the front wheel on
the other side of the vehicle, or on inclines,
in front of this wheel. On a steep grade, take
other steps to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
3. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking up vehicle
1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel so that the entire sur-

2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point when cranking
up, refer to illustration detail.

At a glance

2. When stowing the wheel and tools in the
vehicle, execute these steps in the reverse
order.
3. Check and correct the tire inflation pressure
at the earliest opportunity.
Protect valve stems and valve stem
seal caps against dirt and contamination. Dirt in valve stems is a frequent source
of gradual air loss.<
4. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 90, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 92.
5. Replace the damaged tire as soon as possible and have the new wheel/tire balanced.

Controls

The vehicle jack is designed for
changing wheels only. Do not attempt
to raise another vehicle model with it or to
raise any load of any kind. To do so could
cause accidents and personal injury.<

specified torque. The tightening torque is
88.5 lb ft/120 Nm.<

Driving tips

face of the jack base rests on the ground
perpendicularly beneath the jacking point.

2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from
the mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub. Also clean the lug bolts.
3. Position the new wheel or compact wheel.
Secure the wheel by screwing at least two
lug bolts into opposite bolt holes.
When you mount wheels other than Genuine BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug
bolts may also be required.
4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten all
the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from
beneath the vehicle.

After mounting
1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
To ensure safety, always have the
lug bolts checked with a calibrated
torque wrench as soon as possible to
ensure that they are tightened to the

Only one compact wheel may be
mounted. You should re-equip with
wheels and tires of the original size as quickly as
possible.<

Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate climate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in
all matters concerning the battery.

Charging battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine off. Connections, refer to Jump starting
on page 220.
217

Communications Entertainment

1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.

The driving characteristics change, for example
reduced track stability on braking, extended
braking distance, and altered self-steering
characteristics in the limit range. In conjunction
with winter tires, these characteristics are more
pronounced.

Mobility

Mounting a wheel

Drive reservedly and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.

Reference

3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
changing is raised from the ground.

Navigation

Driving with compact wheel

Replacing components

Disposal

In glove compartment

Have old batteries disposed of by your
BMW center or hand them in to a recycling center. Maintain the battery in an upright
position for transport and storage. Always
restrain the battery to prevent it from tipping
over during transport.<

1. Release both quick-release fasteners.

Power failure
After a temporary power loss, the functioning of
some equipment may be limited and require
reinitialization. Individual settings are also lost
and must be updated:
> Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 47.
> Time and Date
The values must be updated, refer to
page 82.

2. Fold the cover forward or remove.

Sedan: in luggage compartment
1. Lift up floor mat.
2. Release the quick-release fastener of the
right side panel and pull out the panel.

> Radio
Stations must be stored again if necessary,
refer to page 158.
> Navigation system
Wait until the system starts, refer to
page 149.

Fuses

Sports Wagon: in cargo area

Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating, as
this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately
resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<

Sedan
Spare fuses, plastic tweezers and fuse allocation diagram are located in the compartment for
the onboard tool kit, refer to page 211.

Sports Wagon
Reserve fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are
contained in the onboard tool kit, refer to
page 211. A fuse allocation diagram is located
in the cargo area behind the right-hand side
panel.

1. Unhook the retaining strap*, refer to
page 119.
2. Open the right-hand side panel.

> Radio readiness is activated.
> The car phone is logged on to a mobile
communications network.
> The emergency call system is operable.
When the contract of participation with
BMW Assist expires, the car phone can be
deactivated by a BMW center without having to
visit a workshop. Following deactivation of the
car phone, no emergency calls can be made.
The car phone can be reactivated after signing a
new contract with a BMW center.

Initiating an emergency call
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.

If the LED flashes, but you are unable to hear
the BMW Assist response center through the
hands-free system, this could indicate, for
instance, that the hands-free system is no
longer operational. However, you may then still
be audible for the response center.
Under certain conditions, an emergency call is
automatically initiated immediately after a
severe accident. The automatic emergency call
is not affected by the button being pressed.
For technical reasons, the emergency call
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
conditions.<

Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located in the luggage
compartment lid/tailgate.

Sedan

2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the
voice connection to the BMW Assist response
center has been established, the LED flashes.

Loosen the wing nut to open.

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips

> BMW Assist is enabled.
Enabling BMW Assist, refer to page 187.

If the current position of your vehicle can be
determined, it will be forwarded to the
BMW Assist response center.

Navigation

> Full preparation package mobile phone.
With this equipment, an emergency call is
still possible when no mobile phone is
logged on in the vehicle.

Communications Entertainment

Conditions for an emergency call:

If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until
the connection has been established. You will
then be able to provide a detailed description of
the situation.

Mobility

Emergency call

Reference

Giving and receiving assistance

Sports Wagon

Release the two quick-release fasteners and
fold down the trim piece.

The first-aid kit is located in the right side panel
of the cargo area. Before opening the side
panel, pull the retaining strap* toward the rear
by its rear end and unhook it.

First-aid kit*
Some of the articles contained in the first-aid kit
have a limited service life. Therefore, check the
expiration dates of the contents regularly and
replace the contents concerned in good time if
necessary.

Roadside Assistance*

Sedan

The phone numbers of the Roadside Assistance in your home country can be found in the
Contact brochure.

The Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group
offers you assistance in the event of a breakdown around the clock, including on weekends
and public holidays.

With BMW Assist or TeleService, you can contact the Roadside Assistance of the BMW
Group for assistance in the event of a breakdown directly via iDrive, refer to page 189.

Jump starting
The first-aid kit is located in the luggage compartment lid.
Loosen the wing nut to open.

When your battery is discharged, you can use
two jumper cables to start your BMW with
power from the battery in a second vehicle. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running. Carefully adhere to the following sequence, both to
prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to
guard against possible personal injuries.<

Connecting jumper cables
To avoid personal injury from sparks, follow this sequence when connecting
jumper cables.<
In your BMW, the so-called auxiliary terminal
for jump starting in the engine compartment
serves as a positive terminal for the battery, also
refer to engine compartment overview on
page 205. The cover cap is marked with a +.
1. Fold open the cover of the BMW startingaid terminal. To do so, pull the tab.

5. Attach the second end of the cable to the
negative terminal of the battery or to the
engine or body ground of the vehicle to be
started.

Starting engine
1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle
and allow it to run at idle for several minutes
at slightly increased speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the connection sequence.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<

2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+
to the positive terminal of the battery or a
starting-aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second end of the cable to the
positive terminal of the battery or to a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/–
to the negative terminal of the battery or to
an engine or body ground of the assisting
vehicle.

Tow-starting and towing

At a glance
Navigation

There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<

Communications Entertainment

3. Switch off any electrical systems and components in both vehicles.

Driving tips

Controls

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.

Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<

Using tow fitting
The screw-on tow-fitting must always be carried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW.
221

Mobility

1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the battery.

Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative terminal.

Reference

Preparation

Giving and receiving assistance

Sedan:
It is located in the toolkit in the luggage compartment lid, refer to page 211.
Sports Wagon:
It is located in the toolkit behind the left side
panel in the cargo area, refer to page 211.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing only on roads. Avoid lateral
loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise damage to the
tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.<

to page 220. There is no power assistance with
the engine stopped. This then requires
increased effort for braking and steering. Active
steering is deactivated and larger steering
wheel movements are required.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers depending on the local regulations. If the electrical system fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with
a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.

Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Access to screw thread

Automatic transmission

Rectangular cover panel in bumper: press on
the arrow symbol on the cover panel.

Selector lever in position N.

Front

Changing selector lever position, refer to
Deactivating selector lever interlock page 64.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/
70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km, otherwise the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<

SMG Sequential Manual Transmission
Engage selector lever position N with the ignition switched on.

Towing methods

Rear

Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body
and chassis parts, otherwise damage may
result.<
In some countries, towing with tow bars or
ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiarize yourself with the regulations on towing in the
respective country.

With tow bar
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 58, otherwise the low
beams, tail lamps, turn signals and windshield
wipers would not be available. If the vehicle
electrical system fails, do not tow-start or tow
the vehicle. The electric steering-wheel lock
cannot be unlocked and the vehicle cannot be
steered. For information on jump starting, refer

The towing vehicle may not be lighter
than the vehicle to be towed, otherwise it
will not be possible to reliably control vehicle
response.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset
angle, please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.

To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Only attach tow ropes to the tow fittings, as
attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to
damage.<

With tow truck

If the electrical system fails, do not towstart or tow the vehicle, as otherwise the
electric steering-wheel lock cannot be
unlocked and the vehicle cannot be steered.<
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
comply with country-specific regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58.
3. Shift into 3rd gear. For information on SMG,
see below.
4. Tow-start with the clutch completely
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch again completely.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warning flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.

Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

With tow truck for 525xi, 530xi

1. Tow-start in selector lever position N.
2. Select the Sequential mode. The correct
gear will be selected and engaged automatically.
Do not activate the HDC Hill Descent
Control of the 525xi, 530 xi during towstarting, refer to page 88.<

At a glance
Reference

Mobility

Do not tow the BMW with xDrive with the
front or rear axle raised individually, otherwise the wheels may block and the transfer
case may be damaged.<

SMG Sequential Manual Transmission

Controls

When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.

Driving tips

With tow rope

Do not tow-start the vehicle if possible, but
instead start the engine by means of jump starting, refer to page 220. With a catalytic converter, tow-starting should only be carried out
with the engine cold, and with automatic transmissions, the engine cannot be started by towstarting.

Navigation

Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings,
as attachment to other vehicle parts can
lead to damage.<

Tow-starting

Communications Entertainment

> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will
exert lateral forces, tending to push the
vehicle sideways.

Reference
This chapter contains the technical data,
the short commands of the voice command
system, and the index that will direct you
as quickly as possible to the information
you are looking for.

Technical data

Technical data
Engine data
Displacement

cu in/cmµ

No. of cylinders
Maximum output

at engine speed

rpm

Maximum torque

lb ft/Nm

at engine speed

rpm

525i/xi

530i/xi

550i

182.8/2,996

292.8/4,799

215

255

360

6,250

6,600

6,300

185/251

220/298

360/488

2,750

3,400

At a glance
Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

Dimensions

Reference

Mobility

All dimensions are given in inches/mm.
Vehicle height with xDrive: 58.3 in/1,482 mm
Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.5 ft/11.4 m, with xDrive 39 ft/11.9 m

Technical data
All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 39 ft/11.9 m

Curb weight
> Manual transmission, SMG

lbs./kg

3,395/1,540

3,450/1,565

3,902/1,770

> Automatic transmission

lbs./kg

3,439/1,560

3,472/1,575

3,924/1,780

> Manual transmission, SMG

lbs./kg

4,497/2,040

4,552/2,065

5,004/2,270

> Automatic transmission

lbs./kg

4,541/2,060

4,575/2,075

5,026/2,280

Approved gross vehicle weight

Load

lbs./kg

1,102/500

Approved front axle load

lbs./kg

2,161/980

2,227/1,010

2,469/1,120

Approved rear axle load

lbs./kg

2,601/1,180

2,679/1,215

Approved roof load capacity

lbs./kg

220/100

Luggage compartment capacity

cu ft/l

18.4/520

525xi

530xi

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
Sedan
Curb weight
> Manual transmission

lbs./kg

3,593/1,630

3,670/1,660

> Automatic transmission

lbs./kg

3,638/1,650

3,704/1,680

> Manual transmission

lbs./kg

4,696/2,130

4,762/2,160

> Automatic transmission

lbs./kg

4,740/2,150

4,806/2,180

Load

lbs./kg

1,102/500

Approved front axle load

lbs./kg

2,315/1,050

Approved rear axle load

lbs./kg

2,646/1,200

Approved roof load capacity

lbs./kg

220/100

Luggage compartment capacity

cu ft/l

18.4/520

Approved gross vehicle weight

At a glance

550i

Controls

530i

Driving tips

525i

Navigation

Sedan

Communications Entertainment

Weights

Reference

Mobility

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.

Technical data

Sports Wagon

530xi

Curb weight
> Manual transmission

lbs./kg

3,858/1,750

> Automatic transmission

lbs./kg

3,891/1,765

Approved gross vehicle weight
> Manual transmission

lbs./kg

5,049/2,290

> Automatic transmission

lbs./kg

5,082/2,305

Load

lbs./kg

1,190/540

Approved front axle load

lbs./kg

2,381/1,080

Approved rear axle load

lbs./kg

2,866/1,300

Approved roof load capacity

lbs./kg

Luggage compartment capacity

cu ft/l

220/100
17.7-58.3/500-1,650

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.

Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank

gal/liters

approx. 18.5/70

of that reserve

gal/liters

approx. 2.1/8

Window cleaning system
> Sedan

Fuel grade: page 195
For more details: page 66

US quarts/liters

approx. 3.2/3

> incl. headlamp washer system US quarts/liters

approx. 5.3/5

> Sports Wagon

US quarts/liters

approx. 5.3/5

> 525i/xi, 530i/xi

US quarts/liters

6.9/6.5

> 550i

US quarts/liters

8.5/8.0

Engine with oil filter change

BMW High Performance
Synthetic Oil.
Oil grades: page 206

Function

Command

To open the assistance window 20

{Assistance window}

To select the display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north},
{Assistance window map direction of travel},
{Assistance window arrow display},
{Assistance window perspective},
{Assistance window current position},
{Assistance window trip computer} or
{Assistance window onboard info}
To change scale in assistance window 146

{Assistance window scale ... feet} or
{Assistance window scale ... miles}

Command

{Phone}

To dial phone number 179

{Dial number}

To display phone book 179

{A to Z}

To select from the phone book 179

{Call ...} or
{Dial name}

To display "Top 8" 180

{Top 8}

To redial 179

{Redial}

To display "Received calls" 180

{Received calls}

To display "Missed calls" 180

{Missed calls}

To display "Bluetooth" 176

{Bluetooth}

To open BMW Assist 189

{BMW Assist}

To open "BMW Service" 189

{BMW Service}

To open "BMW Contact" 181

{BMW Contact}

To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 181

{BMW Contact numbers}

Mobility

Function

To open phone 175

Communications Entertainment

Communication

Navigation

Assistance window

Driving tips

Controls

item is selected. Here are the important short
commands for the voice command system.

Reference

With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu

At a glance

Short commands of voice command
system*

Short commands of voice command system

Navigation
Function

Command

To open navigation system 133

{Navigation}

To open "Enter address" 133

{Enter address}

To open "New destination" 133

{New destination}

To display "Input map" 137

{Input map}

To display destination list 139

{Destination list}

To display address book 140

{Address book}

To display route criteria 142

{Route preference}

To start destination guidance 144

{Start guidance}

To end destination guidance 144

{Stop guidance}

To display arrow display 145

{Arrow display}

To display map display 146

{Map},{Map facing north},
{Map direction of travel} or
{Perspective}

To change scale 146

{Scale ... miles} or
{Scale ... feet}

To display roads or towns/cities along route 146 {Route list}
To switch on voice instructions 147

{Navigation info on}

To switch off voice instructions 147

{Navigation info off}

To repeat voice instructions 147

{Repeat navigation info}

To open route 142, 146

{Route}

To open "New route" 148

{New route}

To display current position 148

{Current position}

Onboard info
Function

Command

To open "Car Data" 76

{Car data}

To display computer 76

{Onboard info}

To display trip computer 76

{Trip computer}

To open speed limit 81

{Limit}

To open stopwatch 81

{Stopwatch}

At a glance

Entertainment
Command

{Audio}

To switch on radio 156

{Radio on},
{FM on} or
{AM on}

To open "FM" 156

{FM menu}

To open "AM" 156

{AM menu}

To open "All stations" 156

{FM All stations}

To select radio station 156

{Station ...} or
{Choose station}

To open "Presets" 156

{FM presets} or
{AM presets}

To select stored radio station 156

{Choose preset}

To open "Manual" 157

{FM manual},
{AM manual} or
{Choose frequency},
{Frequency ... Megahertz}

To open strongest radio stations 157

{AM Autostore}

To open "WB" 160

{Weatherband menu}

To open "SAT" 162

{SAT radio menu}

To switch on satellite radio 162

{SAT radio}

To open "Presets" of satellite radio 163

{SAT radio presets}

To open "All channels" of satellite radio 162

{SAT radio all channels}

To open "Categories" of satellite radio 162

{SAT radio categories}

To open CD player 165

{CD menu}

To switch on CD player 165

{CD}

To open CD changer 165

{CD-changer menu}

To switch on CD changer 165

{CD-changer}

To select CD 165

{CD 1...6}

To select music track 166

{CD track ...}

To select CD and music track 166

{CD 1...6 track ...}

Driving tips
Mobility

{Choose weatherband station}

Navigation

{Weatherband on}

Communications Entertainment

160

To select a weatherband station 160

Reference

To switch on weatherband

Controls

Function

Tone control 153

Short commands of voice command system

Climate
Function

Command

To adjust temperature distribution for front seat
heating 50

{Seat heater distribution}

To open "Vent settings" 107

{Vent settings}

To open "Automatic programs" 106

{Automatic programs}

To open "Parked car ventilation" 109

{Parked car operation}

To open "Automatic ventilation" 109

{Automatic ventilation}

To display activation times 109

{Activation time}

menu
Function

Command

To open "Door locks" 30, 32

{Door locks}

To open "Steering wheel buttons" 53

{Steering wheel buttons}

To open "Lighting" 64

{Lighting}

To open "Communication settings" 187

{Communication settings}

To open "BMW Service settings" 187

{BMW Service settings}

To open "BMW Service" 189

{BMW service}

To open "Service requirements" 77, 188

{Service requirements}

To open "Service" 77, 188

{Service}

To display "Check Control messages" 80

{Check Control messages}

To open "Display settings" 82

{Display settings}

To open "Head-Up Display" 97

{Head-up display}

To activate speed limit 81

{Limit on}

To deactivate speed limit 81

{Limit off}

To set brightness of Control Display 83

{Brightness}

To open "Units" 84

{Units}

To open "Languages" 84, 147

{Language}

To open "Time" 82

{Time}

To open "Date" 83

{Date}

To open "PDC" 85

{PDC}

To open "FTM" 90

{FTM}

To open "TPM" 92

{TPM}

To open "HDC" 88

{HDC}

To open "Entertainment settings" 153

{Entertainment settings}

Deactivating BMW Night Vision 99

{Close Night Vision}

Displaying settings for BMW Night Vision 99

{Night Vision configuration}

At a glance

Command

{Night Vision on}

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

Function

Activating BMW Night Vision 99

Everything from A to Z

Everything from A to Z
Index
"..." Identifies Control Display
texts used to select
individual functions, and
indicates where to find them
in the text.

A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 86
ACC, refer to Active cruise
control 67
Acceleration assistant for
SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 63
Accessories 6
Acoustic signal, refer to Check
Control 79
Activated-charcoal filter 109
"Activation time" for parkedcar ventilation 109
Active cruise control 67
– indicator lamp 70
– radar sensor 71
– selecting distance 69
– warning lamps 71
Active head restraints,
front 49
Active seat 51
Active seat ventilation 51
Active steering 93
– warning lamp 94
Adapter for spare key 28
Adaptive brake lamps, refer to
Brake force display 94
Adaptive Head Light 102
"Add digits" for mobile
phone 180
"Address book" for navigation
system 140

Address for navigation
– deleting 141
– entering 133, 136
– selecting 141
– storing 140
– storing current position 140
"Add to address book" 140
"Add to destination list" 136
Adjusting active backrest
width 47
Adjusting confirmation signals
for locking and unlocking 31
Adjusting the tone during
audio operation, refer to
Tone control 153
Adjusting thigh support 46
Adjustment in audio mode
– front-to-rear 154
– right/left balance 154
"After door opened" 48
"After unlocking" 48
Airbags 94
– sitting safely 45
– warning lamp 96
Air circulation, refer to Air
recirculation 108
Air distribution
– automatic 106
– manual 107
Airing, refer to Ventilation 108
Air recirculation
– AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 108
– recirculated-air mode 108
"Air recirculation on / off" 53
Air vent outlets of automatic
climate control 105
Air vents 105
– refer to Ventilation 108
Air volume 107
AKI, refer to Fuel quality 195

Alarm system 37
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 38
– interior motion sensor 38
– switching off alarm 38
– switching off tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion
sensor 38
– tilt alarm sensor 38
"All channels" 163
"All doors" 30
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 202
"All stations", calling up with
radio 156, 159
All-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 87
Alterations, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Altering stretch of road 148
"AM", reception
range 152, 156
Antenna for mobile phone 174
Antifreeze
– coolant 207
– washer fluid 66
Antilock Brake System
ABS 86
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 37
Anti-theft system, refer to
Central locking system 29
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 229
Approved engine oils 206
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 229
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest, rear 116
Around the center console 14
Around the steering wheel 10

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips

Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 46
Backrests, refer to Seats 46
Backrest width adjustment 46
Back seats, refer to Rear seats
Backup lamps, refer to
Reverse gear 61
– replacing bulbs 213
"Balance", refer to Tone
control 154
Balance, refer to Tone
control 154
Band-aids, refer to First-aid
kit 220
Bass, refer to Tone
control 153
"Bass", tone control 154
Battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 217
– jump starting 220
Battery disposal
– remote control with comfort
access 40
– vehicle battery 218
Battery replacement, remote
control with comfort
access 40
Being towed 222
Belts, refer to Safety belts 49
Beverage holder, refer to Cup
holders 114
Blower, refer to Air
volume 107
"BMW Assist" 189

Navigation

Communications Entertainment

"Avoid highways" for
navigation system 143
Avoiding freeways for
navigation 142
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 38
"Avoid tollroads" for
navigation system 143
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 229
"A - Z" 180

Mobility

Automatic closing of doors,
refer to Automatic soft
closing 33
Automatic curb monitor 52
Automatic lighting
– refer to Automatic headlamp
control 101
– refer to Daytime running
lamps 102
– refer to High-beam
assistant 103
– refer to Interior lamps 104
– refer to Pathway lighting 101
Automatic low-beam function,
refer to High-beam
assistant 103
"Automatic programs" 106
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 108
Automatic roll-up cover,
Sports Wagon 117
Automatic soft closing 33
Automatic station search 157
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– deactivating selector lever
interlock 64
– interlock 63
– kick-down 64
– selector lever interlock 63
– shiftlock 63
– sport program 64
– tow-starting 222, 223
– with comfort access 40
"Automatic ventilation" 109
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 106
"Autostore" on the
radio 156, 158
AUX-In
– connection 114
– refer to External audio
device 171
Average fuel consumption 75
– setting the units 84
Average speed, refer to
Computer 75
"Avoid ferries" for navigation
system 143

Reference

Arrival time
– refer to Computer 76
– refer to Starting destination
guidance 144
"Arrow display" for navigation
system 145
Ashtray
– front 115
– rear 115
Assist, refer to
BMW Assist 187
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 86
Assistance window 20
"Assist. window off" 21
AUC Automatic recirculatedair control 108
Audio 152
– controls 152
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 153
– volume 153
"Audio", refer to Tone
control 153
"Audio Aux" 152, 171
– on external audio device 171
Audio device, external 114
Automatic
– air distribution 106
– air volume 106
– garage door opener 111
– headlamp control 101
– service notification 188
– steering wheel adjustment,
refer to Easy entry/exit 52
– storing stations 157
– tailgate operation 36
Automatically switching
between high beams and
low beams, refer to Highbeam assistant 103
Automatic car washes 126
– also refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Automatic climate control 105
– automatic air
distribution 106
– switching off 108

Everything from A to Z

BMW Assist 187
– enabling 187
– services offered 188
"BMW Contact" 182
"BMW Contact
Numbers" 182
BMW homepage 4
BMW maintenance
system 209
BMW Night Vision 98
– activating 99
– cleaning camera 100
– cleaning camera, refer to
Wiper system 66
– deactivating 99
– making settings 99
"BMW Service" 189
"BMW Service settings" 188
BMW website 4
Bottle holder, refer to Cup
holders 114
Brake Assistant, refer to DBC
Dynamic Brake Control 86
Brake fluid 207
– warning lamp 207
Brake force display 94
Brake lamps
– brake force display 94
– replacing bulbs 213
Brake pads 208
– breaking-in 124
Brake rotors 126
Brakes
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 86
– brake fluid 207
– brake force display 94
– brake pads 208
– breaking-in 124
– handbrake 60
– warning lamps 13
Brake system 124, 207
– brake fluid level 207
– brake pads 124, 208
– breaking-in 124
– disk brakes 126
– warning lamp 207

Braking
– CBC Cornering Brake
Control 86
– DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 86
– electronic brake-force
distribution 86
– refer to Braking safely 125
Braking safely 125
Breakdown assistance 189
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 220
Breaking-in the clutch 124
Breaking-in the
differential 124
Break-in period 124
"Brightness" 83
– with BMW Night Vision 100
Brightness of Control
Display 83
Button for starting engine 58
Buttons on steering wheel 11

C
California Proposition 65
Warning 6
"Call" 180
Call
– accepting 179
– displaying accepted 180
– ending 179
– in absence 180
– starting 179
Calling
– from phone book 179
– from Top 8 list 180
– redialing 180
– refer to telephone operating
instructions
Can holder, refer to Cup
holders 114
Capacities 230
Capacity
– of cargo area 229
– of luggage
compartment 229
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 217

Car care, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Car-care products, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
"Car Data" 76
Care 210
– refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Cargo
– refer to Loading 126
– securing 128
– securing with ski bag 120
Cargo area
– capacity 229
– emergency operation, refer
to Opening manually 36
– increasing 117
– opening/closing, refer to
Tailgate 35
– opening from inside 35
– opening from outside 35
– opening with remote
control 31
Cargo area cover, refer to Rollup cover
Caring for artificial leather,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Caring for leather, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for light-alloy wheels,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Caring for the carpet, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for the vehicle finish,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Car key, refer to Keys/remote
control 28
Car phone 174
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 113
– refer to Mobile phone 174
– refer to separate operating
instructions

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

Comfort operation
– windows with comfort
access 39
– with comfort access 39
Comfort seat 46
"Communication" 178, 189
"Communication
settings" 188
Compact Disc
– refer to CD changer 165
– refer to CD player 165
Compact wheel
– inflation pressure 197
– wheel change 216
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 58
Compartments
– in cargo area 118
– refer to Storage area
package 119
– refer to Storage
compartments 114
Compressed audio files 165
Computer 75
– displays on Control
Display 76
– hour signal 83
"Concert hall", refer to Tone
control 154
Condition Based Service
CBS 209
"Confirmation" 31
Connecting car vacuum
cleaner, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 115
Consumption, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 75
Consumption indicator
– Energy Control 75
Consumption statistics, refer
to Average fuel
consumption 75
"Continue guidance to
destination?" 145
"Contrast" with BMW Night
Vision 100

Mobility

Changing language on
Control Display 84
Changing units of measure on
Control Display 84
Changing wheels 201, 215
CHECK button 80
Check Control 79
"Check Control
messages" 80
Check Gas Cap 195
Checking the air pressure,
refer to Tire inflation
pressure 196
Child-restraint fixing system
LATCH 56
Child restraints 54
Child restraint systems 54
Child-safety lock 57
Child seats 54
Chime, refer to Check
Control 79
Chock 215
Chrome parts, care, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Cigarette lighter 115
Cleaning, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
"Climate" 50, 106
Clock 74
– 12h/24h mode 83
– setting time and date 82
Closing
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
Closing fuel filler cap 195
Clothes hooks 114
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting
engine 59
"Comfort", active backrest
width adjustment 47
Comfort access 38
– observe in car wash 40
– replacing battery 40
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14

Reference

Car radio, refer to Radio 156
Car wash 126
– also refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– with comfort access 40
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 124
"Categories" 163
CBC Cornering Brake
Control 86
CBS Condition Based
Service 209
"CD" 152, 165
CD changer 165
– controls 152
– fast forward/reverse 169
– installation location 169
– playing a track 167
– random order 168
– repeating a track 168
– selecting a CD 165
– selecting a track 166
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 153
– volume 153
CD player 165
– controls 152
– fast forward/reverse 169
– playing a track 167
– random order 168
– repeating a track 168
– selecting a track 166
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 153
– volume 153
Center armrest
– front 113
– rear 116
Center brake lamp 214
Center console 14
"Central locking" 30
Central locking system 29
– comfort access 38
– from inside vehicle 32
Changes, technical
– refer to For your own
safety 5
– refer to Parts and
accessories 6

Everything from A to Z

Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– setting brightness 83
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls, refer to Cockpit 10
Convenience operation
– glass sunroof 31
– windows 31
Convenience start, refer to
Starting engine 59
Coolant 207
– checking level 207
– temperature 74
Cooling, maximum 107
Cornering Brake Control
CBC 86
Country of destination for
navigation 134
Courtesy lamps 104
Cover, roll-up cover,
Sports Wagon 117
Cradle for telephone or mobile
phone 113
Cruise control 66, 67
– active cruise control 67
Cruising range 75
Cup holders 114
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 229
Current fuel consumption 75
"Current position" 148
Current position
– displaying 148
– entering 140
– storing 140
"Curve mode" with
BMW Night Vision 100
"Customer
Relations" 182, 190
Cylinders, refer to Engine
data 226

D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Data 226
– capacities 230
– dimensions 227
– engine 226
– technical data 226
– weights 229
"Date" 83
Date 74
– display format 83
– retrieval 74
– setting 83
"Date format" 83
Daytime running lamps 102
DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 86
"Deactivated" 48
Deactivating selector lever
interlock 64
Decommissioning the vehicle,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Defect
– fuel filler door 194
– glass sunroof 42
– luggage compartment lid 34
– tailgate 36
Defrosting windows 107
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 107
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 107
"Delete address book" for
navigation system 142
"Delete all numbers" for
mobile phone 181
"Delete data" for navigation
system 142
"Delete" for mobile
phone 181
Destination address
– deleting 141
– entering 133, 136

Destination for navigation
– destination list 139
– entering via voice 136
– entry 133
– selecting from address
book 141
– selecting using
information 138
– storing 140
Destination guidance 144
– bypassing route
sections 148
– canceling voice
instructions 53
– changing specified
route 142
– displaying routes 145
– distance and arrival 144
– interrupting 144
– starting 144
– terminating/continuing 144
– voice instructions 147
– volume of voice
instructions 147
Destination list for
navigation 139
Destinations recently driven
to 139
"Details" in audio mode 167
"Dial" for mobile phone 179
"Dial number" 179
"Diamond button" 53
Diamond button 53
Digital clock 74
Digital radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 160
Dimensions 227
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 64
Direction announcements,
refer to Voice
instructions 147
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 147
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 140
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 226

Easy entry/exit 52
– backrest width 47
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on CD player 152
Electrical malfunction
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 194
– glass sunroof, electric 42
– luggage compartment lid 34
– panorama glass sunroof 44
– tailgate 36
Electric steering wheel
adjustment 52
Electronic brake-force
distribution 86
Electronic oil level check 205
Emergency call 219

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 194
– glass sunroof 42
– luggage compartment lid 34
– panorama glass sunroof 44
– selector lever interlock,
automatic transmission 64
– tailgate 36
Emergency release for
luggage compartment lid in
luggage compartment 34
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 220
"Emission inspect." 78
"Enable services" 188
"End call" 179
"End Night Vision" 100
Energy-conscious driving,
refer to Energy Control 75
Energy Control 75
Engine
– breaking-in 124
– data 226
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 74
– speed 226
– starting 59
– starting, comfort access 38
– starting difficulties 59
– switching off 60
Engine compartment 205
Engine coolant 207
Engine oil
– adding 206
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 206
– approved engine oil 206
– checking oil level 205
– electronic oil level check 205
"Engine oil level" 206
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 226
Engine overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 74
Engine speed 226

Mobility

Driving stability control
systems 86
Driving through water 125
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 124
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 107
Drying the air, refer to Cooling
function 107
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 86
– indicator lamp 13, 87
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 87
– activating 87
– indicator lamp 13, 87
DVD for navigation 132
Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 86
Dynamic Drive 89
Dynamic Driving Control 62
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 86
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 87

Reference

"Display" 84
Display, refer to iDrive 16
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 104
"Display off" 21
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 12
"Display settings" 82
Displays on the windshield,
refer to Head-Up Display 96
Disposal
– battery of remote control
with comfort access 40
– vehicle battery 218
Distance, refer to
Computer 76
Distance cruise control, refer
to Active cruise control 67
"Distance to dest." 76
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 76
Distance warning, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 85
Divided rear seat back, refer to
Through-loading
system 116
Door entry lighting 104
Door key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Door lock 32
Door locking, acknowledgment signals 31
"Door locks" 30
Doors
– manual operation 32
– remote control 30
DOT Quality Grades 200
Draft-free ventilation 108
Drinks holder, refer to Cup
holders 114
Drive mode 62
"Driver's door only" 30
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 101
Driving notes 124
Driving route, refer to
Displaying route 145

Everything from A to Z

Engine starting, refer to
Starting engine 59
"Enter address" 134, 140
Entering destination via town/
city name 134
Entering the
address 133, 136
Entering the intersection 135
Entering town/city for
navigation 134
Entering zip code for
navigation 135
"Entertainment" 152
"Entertainment
settings" 153, 160
Entertainment sound output
on/off 153
Entry map for destination 137
"Equalizer", refer to Tone
control 155
Equalizer, refer to Tone
control 155
"ESN" 162
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 86
Event Data Recorders 210
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 124
Exterior mirrors 51
– automatic dimming
feature 125
– automatic heating 51
– folding in and out 51
– tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 52
External audio
device 114, 171
Eye for tow-starting and
towing, refer to Tow
fitting 221

F
"Fader", refer to Tone
control 154
Fader, refer to Tone
control 154

Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 79
False alarm, refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 38
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 49
– warning lamp 49
Fastest route for
navigation 142
"Fast route" for
navigation 143
"Favorites" calling up with
radio 159
First aid, refer to First-aid
kit 220
First-aid kit 220
Flashing during locking/
unlocking, refer to Setting
confirmation signals 31
Flashlight, refer to
Rechargeable flashlight 113
Flat tire
– changing wheels 215
– compact wheel 216
– Flat Tire Monitor 89, 90
– run-flat tires 90, 93, 201
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 91
Flat Tire Monitor 89
– false alarms 90
– initializing system 90
– show chains 203
– system limits 90
– warning lamp 90
Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 201
"FM", reception
range 152, 156
FM, waveband 156
Fog lamps 104
– indicator lamp 13, 104
Folding rear seat
back 116, 117
Fold-over rear seat
back 116, 117
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 125
Footwell lamps 104

Forward, fast
– CD changer 169
– CD player 169
For your own safety 5
4-wheel drive system, refer to
xDrive 87
Freeway, refer to Route
criteria 142
Front airbags 94
Front armrest, refer to Center
armrest, front 113
Front passenger airbags,
deactivating 95
Front seat adjustment 46
"FTM" 90
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 89
Fuel 195
– capacity 230
– display 75
– high-quality brands 195
– quality 195
– specifications 195
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 75
Fuel consumption display,
computer, average fuel
consumption 75
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 75
Fuel filler door 194
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 194
"Full screen" with BMW Night
Vision 100
Fuses 218

G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 111
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 195
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 75

IBOC, refer to High Definition
Radio 160
Ice, refer to Outside temperature warning 74
ID3 tag, refer to Information on
track 167
iDrive 16
– assistance window 20
– automatic climate control
with expanded scope 106
– changing date and time 82
– changing language 84
– changing menu page 19
– changing settings 82
– changing units of measure
and display type 84
– confirming selection or
entry 19
– controller 16
– controls 16
– displays, menus 17
– selecting menu item 19
– setting brightness 83
– start menu 17
– status information 20
– symbols 18
Ignition 58
– switched off 58
– switched on 58
Ignition key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
243

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation

Communications Entertainment

Halogen lamps 212
Handbrake 60
– indicator lamp 13, 60
Hand lamp, refer to
Rechargeable flashlight 113
Hands-free system, refer to
Microphone 14
Hazard warning flashers 15
HD, refer to High Definition
Radio 160
"HDC" 88
HDC Hill Descent Control 88
"HDC on" 88
"HDC on / off" 53

Hills 126
Holder for cups 114
"Home address" for
navigation system 142
Homepage 4
Hood 204
Horn 10
Hot exhaust system 124
"Hour memo" 83
"House number" for destination entry 136
Hydraulic brake assistant,
refer to DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 86
Hydroplaning 125

Mobility

Head airbags 94
Headlamp control,
automatic 101
Headlamp flasher 64
Headlamps 101
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 66
– replacing bulbs 212
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Head Light 102
Head restraints 48
– front head restraints,
active 49
– sitting safely 45
"Head-Up Display" 97
Head-Up Display 96
Heated
– mirrors 51
– rear window 107
– seats 50
– steering wheel 52
Heating 105
– exterior mirrors 51
– interior 105
– rear window 107
– residual heat 108
– seats 50
– steering wheel 52
Heating with engine switched
off, refer to Residual
heat 108
Heavy cargo, refer to Securing
cargo 128
Height, refer to
Dimensions 227
Height adjustment
– seats 46
– steering wheel 52
High-beam assistant 103
High beams 102
– headlamp flasher 102
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulbs 212
High Definition Radio 160
High water, refer to Driving
through water 125
Hill Descent Control HDC 88

Reference

Gear changes
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
Gear display
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
Gearshift lever, manual
transmission 60
Gearshift lever positions,
manual transmission 60
General driving notes 124
Glass sunroof, electric 41
– auto-remote operation from
outside 32
– comfort operation with
comfort access 39
– moving manually 42
– remote control 31
Glove compartment 113
– lighting 113
– rechargeable flashlight 113
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 132
Grills, refer to Ventilation 108
Grills of the automatic climate
control 105
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 229

Everything from A to Z

Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 58
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 58
Ignition lock 58
– starting engine with comfort
access 40
Independent ventilation, refer
to Parked car ventilation 109
Indicator/warning lamps
– active steering 94
– airbags 96
– brake fluid 207
– brake pads 208
– DSC 13, 87
– DTC 13, 87
– Flat Tire Monitor 90
– fog lamps 13
– safety belt warning 49
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 92
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
Individual air distribution 107
Individually programmable
buttons on steering
wheel 53
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 29
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 196
Inflation pressure monitoring
– refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89
– refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 91
Information
– on another location 138
– on current position 138
– on destination location 138
"Information" for navigation
system 138
"Information on
destination" 140
"Initializing..." 90

Initializing
– Flat Tire Monitor 90
– radio, refer to Storing
stations 158
– refer to Power failure 218
– refer to Setting time and
date 82
– seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 47
"Input map" 138
Installation location
– CD changer 169
– mobile phone 113
– navigation drive 132
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 147
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument illumination, refer
to Instrument lighting 104
Instrument lighting 104
Instrument panel
– refer to Cockpit 10
– refer to Instrument
cluster 12
Integrated key 28
Integrated universal remote
control 111
Interesting destination for
navigation 138
"Interim time" 82
Interior lamps 104
– switching on with remote
control 31
Interior motion sensor 38
– switching off 38
Interior rearview mirror 52
– automatic dimming
feature 125
Interlock on automatic
transmission 63
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 65

J
Jacking points 216
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jumpering, refer to Jump
starting 220
Jump starting 220

K
Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort
access 38
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort access 38
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 29
"Keypad" 182
Keys 28
– key-related settings, refer to
Personal Profile 29
Kick-down
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
Knock control 195

L
Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/
low beams 101
Lamps and bulbs 212
"Languages" 84
– for navigation system 147
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 128
Last destinations, refer to
Destination list 139
"Last seat pos." 48
LATCH child-restraint fixing
system 56
Length, refer to
Dimensions 227
License plate lamp, replacing
bulbs 215
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 212

M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 202
Maintenance
– refer to Service and
Warranty Information
Booklet for US models 209
– refer to Service
requirements 77
– refer to Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models 209
Maintenance system 209
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 79
Manual air distribution 107

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

Manually controlled recirculated air 108
Manual mode
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
"Manual" on the radio 157
Manual operation
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 194
– glass sunroof 42
– luggage compartment lid 34
– panorama glass sunroof 44
– selector lever interlock,
automatic transmission 64
Manual transmission 60
"Map direction of travel" 146
Map display 146
Map display facing north 146
"Map facing north" 146
Map for navigation
– changing scale 146
– destination entry 137
Master key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Maximum cooling 107
Maximum speed
– for winter tires 202
– with compact wheel 217
Memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 47
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Microfilter 109
Microphone
– for mobile phone 14
– for voice command
system 14
Mirror dimming feature 125
Mirrors 51
– automatic curb monitor 52
– folding in and out 51
– heating 51
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 47

Mobility

Luggage compartment
– capacity 229
– emergency release 34
– locking separately 34
– opening/closing, refer to
Luggage compartment lid/
tailgate 33
– opening from inside 33
– opening from outside 34
– opening with remote
control 31
Luggage compartment cover,
refer to Roll-up cover 117
Luggage compartment lid 33
– emergency operation, refer
to Manual operation 34
– emergency release 34
– locking separately 34
– opening from inside 33
– opening from outside 34
– unlocking and locking from
inside 32
– unlocking manually 34
Luggage net, refer to
Separation net 118
Luggage rack, refer to Roofmounted luggage rack 128
Lumbar support 46
LW, waveband 156

Reference

Lighter 115
Lighter socket 115
"Lighting" 65, 102
Lighting
– instruments 104
– of the vehicle, refer to
Lamps 101
– refer to High-beam
assistant 103
Light switch 101
"Limit" 81
Loading
– securing cargo 128
– stowing cargo 127
– vehicle 126
"Lock after driving" 33
Lock buttons in the doors,
refer to Locking 33
Locking
– from inside 33
– from outside 31
– setting confirmation
signals 31
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 38
Locking and unlocking doors
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
– setting confirmation
signals 31
Locking out, refer to
Unlocking 39
Locking without key, refer to
Comfort access 38
Low beams 101
– automatic 101
– replacing bulbs 212
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 46
Lug bolts 216
– tightening torque, refer to
After mounting 217
– wrench 215

Everything from A to Z

"Missed calls" 180
Missed calls 180
Mobile communications
devices in vehicle 125
Mobile phone
– accepted calls 180
– adjusting volume 178
– calling 179
– ending call 179
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 113
– missed calls 180
– operation via iDrive 178
– redialing 180
– refer to separate operating
instructions
– Top 8 180
– touch tone dialing, refer to
Tone dialing method 182
Mobile phones, use in the
interior, refer to Mobile
communications
devices 125
Monitor, refer to iDrive 16
Monitoring pressure of tires,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89
"Monitor on / off" 53
Most recent numbers
for mobile phone 180
MP3, refer to Compressed
audio files 165
Multi-function steering wheel,
refer to Buttons on steering
wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 64
– refer to Wiper/washer
system 65
Music track, finding 167
"Mute on / off" 53
MW, waveband 156

N
"Navigation" 76, 133
Navigation destination
– home address 142
– manual entry 133
– selecting via map 137
Navigation drive, installation
location 132
Navigation DVD 132
Navigation instructions, refer
to Switching voice instructions on/off 147
Navigation system 132
– address book 140
– bypassing route
sections 148
– destination entry 133
– destination guidance in
assistance window 132
– destination list 139
– displaying current
position 148
– entering a destination
manually 133
– entering destination via
voice 136
– last destinations 139
– opening 133
– route display 145
– route list 146
– searching for a special
destination 138
– selecting destination using
information 138
– selecting destination via
map 137
– selecting route criteria 142
– starting destination
guidance 144
– switching off, refer to Terminating/continuing destination guidance 144
– terminating/continuing
destination guidance 144
– voice instructions 147
– volume adjustment 147
"Navigation voice
instructions" 53

"Navigation voice instructions
on" 147
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 48
"New address" for navigation
system 140
"New destination" 133, 137
New remote control 28
"New route" 148
New wheels and tires 201
"Next entertainment
source" 53
Night Vision, refer to
BMW Night Vision 98
Night vision device, refer to
BMW Night Vision 98
"Night Vision on / off" 53
"Normal", active backrest
width adjustment 47
Nozzles, refer to Windshield
washer nozzles 66
Nylon rope, refer to Towstarting and towing 221

O
OBD socket 210
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 195
Odometer 74
Oil
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 206
– approved engine oils 206
– capacity 230
– consumption, refer to
Checking engine oil
level 205
– level 205
– refilling, refer to Adding
engine oil 206
Oil change intervals, refer to
Service requirements 77
"On a new destination" for
navigation system 139
Onboard computer, refer to
iDrive 16
"Onboard info" 76
Onboard toolkit 211

Radio
– Autostore 157
– controls 152
– High Definition Radio 160
– sampling stations 157
– satellite radio 161
– selecting frequency
manually 157
– selecting reception
range 152
– selecting waveband 156
– station search 157
– station selection 156
– station with the best
reception 157
– storing stations 158
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 153
– volume 153
– Weather Band, refer to
Weather news flashes 159
Radio key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation

Communications Entertainment

Panic mode 31
Panorama glass sunroof 43
– moving manually 44
Park Distance Control PDC 85
"Parked car operation" 109
"Parked car ventilation" 109
Parked car ventilation 109
– activating activation
time 110
– preselecting activation
times 109
– switching on and off
directly 109

Position
– displaying 148
– storing 140
Power failure 218
Power windows, refer to
Windows 40
Preselecting activation times
of the parked car
ventilation 109
"Presets" on the radio 156
Pressure, tires 196
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 91
"Profile" 191
Programmable buttons on
steering wheel 53
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof, electric 42
– panorama glass sunroof 43
– windows 41

Mobility

Parking, vehicle 60
Parking aid, refer to PDC Park
Distance Control 85
Parking assistant, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 85
Parking brake, refer to
Handbrake 60
Parking lamps 101
– replacing bulbs 213
Parts and accessories 6
Passenger airbags, deactivating, refer to Exception for
front passenger seat 54
Passenger-side exterior
mirror, tilting down 52
"Pathway lighting" 102
Pathway lighting 101
"PDC" 86
"PDC display on" 86
PDC Park Distance Control 85
Personal Profile 29
"Perspective" 146
"Phone" 179
Phone book 178
Phone numbers
– deleting from phone
book 181
– dialing 179
– most recent numbers 180
– selecting in phone book 180
– Top 8 180
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof, electric 42
– panorama glass sunroof 43
– power windows 41
Plasters, refer to First-aid
kit 220
"Play"
– in audio mode 166
– on the radio 163
Plug-in unit for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 58
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated charcoal filter 109

Reference

"On destination" 139
"On location" 139
Opening and closing
– comfort access 38
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
– panorama glass sunroof 43
– using remote control 30
– using the door lock 32
Operation by voice for mobile
phone 183
– adjusting volume 184
– canceling 183
– commands 183
– correcting phone
number 184
– dialing phone number 184
– placing a call 184
– redialing 185
– voice phone book 184
"Options" 190
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Output, refer to Engine
data 226
Outside air, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 108
Outside temperature
display 74
– changing unit of measure 84
– in computer 84

Everything from A to Z

Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 58
Radio readiness 58
– switched off 58
– switched on 58
– with comfort access 39
Rain sensor 65
"Random", random play
sequence 168
"Random all" in audio
mode 169
"Random directory" in audio
mode 169
"RDS" 159
Reading lamps 104
Rear armrest, refer to Center
armrest, rear 116
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 213
– replacing bulbs 213
Rear seat back,
folding 116, 117
Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 49
– folding over
backrest 116, 117
– heating 50
Rear ventilation 109
Rearview mirror 51
Rear window
– changing wiper blade 211
– heating 107
– opening and closing on
Sports Wagon 34
– roller sun blind, refer to Sun
blinds 112
– window wiper on Sports
Wagon 66, 126
Rear window safety switch 41
"Received calls" 180
Reception
– quality 159
– radio stations 159
– regional station 157
Reception level of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 20

Rechargeable flashlight 113
Recirculated-air mode
– air recirculation 108
– AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 108
Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest 46
Recording times, refer to
Stopwatch 81
"Redial" for mobile phone 180
Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 213
Refueling 194
Releasing, hood 204
"Relock door if not
opened" 33
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 75
Remaining distance to destination, refer to Computer 76
Remote control 28
– battery replacement 40
– comfort access 38
– garage door opener 111
– luggage compartment lid 31
– malfunction 31, 40
– tailgate 31
Removing condensation on
the windows 107
"Repeat directory" in audio
mode 168
"Repeat" in audio mode 168
"Repeat track" in audio
mode 168
Replacement fuses 218
Replacement of tires, refer to
Changing wheels 215
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 212
Replacing tires 202
Replacing wheels/tires, refer
to New wheels and tires 201
Reporting an accident, refer
Initiating an emergency
call 219
Reporting safety defects 7

Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 75
Reservoir for washer
systems 66
"Reset" 92
– stopwatch 82
– tone settings 155
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 155
Residual heat 108
Restraint systems
– for children 54
– refer to Safety belts 49
Retaining straps, refer to
Storage area package 119
Retreaded tires 202
Reverse, fast
– CD changer 169
– CD player 169
Reverse gear
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– manual transmission 61
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
Road map 146
"Roadside
Assistance" 182, 189
Roadside Assistance 220
Roadside parking lamps 102
– replacing bulbs 213
Roller sun blind, refer to Sun
blinds 112
Roll-up cover, Sports
Wagon 117
Roof load capacity 229
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 128
Rope, refer to Tow-starting
and towing 221
Rotary pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

Safety 5
Safety belts 49
– damage 50
– sitting safely 45
– warning lamp 49
Safety belt tensioners
– refer to Airbags 94
– refer to Safety belts 49
Safety systems
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 86
– airbags 94
– DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 86
– safety belts 49
Satellite radio 161
– enabling channel 162
– selecting channel 162
– storing channel 162

Selecting new scale for
navigation 146
Selecting route 142
Selection options with
navigation system 142
Selector lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
Selector lever interlock, refer
to Shiftlock
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
Selector lever positions
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
Self-leveling suspension 89
Separation net 118
Sequential Manual Transmission SMG 61
"Service" 77, 188, 205
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 220
Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US
models 209
Service interval indicator, refer
to Service requirements 77
"Service notification" 189
"Service Request" 182, 190
"Service
requirements" 78, 188, 206
Service requirements 77
– also refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 209
"Service Status" 188
"Set"
– in audio mode 152
– on trip computer 77
"Set date" 83
"Set service date" 78
"Set time" 83

Mobility

"SAT" with radio 152, 162
"Save current
destination" 142
"Scan"
– sampling stations 157
– sampling tracks 167
Scan
– CD changer 167
– CD player 167
– radio 157
"Scan all" in audio mode 167
"Scan directory" in audio
mode 167
Screen, refer to iDrive 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 222
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 161
"Seat heater distribution" 50
Seats 46
– active backrest width
adjustment 47
– adjusting the seats 46
– comfort seat 46
– easy entry/exit 47
– heating 50
– lumbar support 46
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 47
– sitting safely 45
– storing the setting 47
– thigh support 46
– ventilation, refer to Active
seat ventilation 51
Securing load
– refer to Securing cargo 128
– with ski bag, refer to
Securing cargo 120
"Select as destination" 139
"Select current speed" 81
Selecting audio sources, refer
to Operation via iDrive 152
Selecting distance for active
cruise control 69
Selecting frequency
manually 157
Selecting menu items 19

Reference

Route 142
– bypassing sections 148
– changing 142, 148
– displaying 145
– displaying arrow display 145
– displaying map 146
– displaying town 146
– list 146
– selecting 142
– selecting criteria 142
Route map, refer to Map
display 146
"Route preference",
changing 142
Route selection 142
RSC, refer to Run-flat
tires 201
Run-flat tires 201
– continuing driving with a
damaged tire 90, 93
– flat tire 90, 93
– new wheels and tires 201
– tire inflation
pressure 90, 93, 196
– tire replacement 201, 202

Everything from A to Z

Settings
– BMW Night Vision 99
– changing on Control
Display 82
– clock, 12h/24h mode 83
– configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 29
Setting speed limit 81
Setting time, refer to Preselecting activation time 109
"Set tire pressure" 90
Shifting gears
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 62
Shiftlock
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
Shift paddles 62
Short commands of voice
command system 231
"Short route" for
navigation 143
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 142
Shoulder support 46
"Show current position" 138
"Show destination
position" 138
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 168
– CD player 168
Side airbags 94
Side marker lamps, replacing
bulbs 213
Side turn signals, replacing
bulbs 213
Side window blinds, refer to
Sun blinds 112
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sitting safely 45
– with airbags 45
– with head restraint 45
– with safety belts 45
Ski bag 120

Sliding/tilt sunroof
– refer to Glass sunroof,
electric 41
– refer to Panorama glass
sunroof 43
Slope assistant, refer to
Starting assistant 125
SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
– acceleration assistant 63
– breaking-in 124
– Dynamic Driving Control 62
– gear display 61
– kick-down 62
– shiftlock 61
– towing 222
– tow-starting 223
Snow chains 203
Socket for Onboard
Diagnostics interface 210
Socket for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 58
Sockets, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 115
Soft closure aid, refer to
Automatic soft closing 33
Song search with CD, refer to
Playing a track 167
SOS, refer to Initiating an
emergency call 219
Spare fuses 218
Spare key 28
– adapter 28
Spare remote control 28
Spare wheel
– refer to Changing
wheels 215
– refer to Compact wheel 216
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 206
Specified oil grades, refer to
Approved engine oils 206
Speed
– with compact wheel 217
– with winter tires 202
Speed-dependent
volume 154
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 81

Speedometer 12
"Speed volume", refer to Tone
control 154
"Sport", active backrest width
adjustment 47
Sport program, refer to
Dynamic Driving Control 62
Sports Wagon
– automatic roll-up cover 117
– automatic tailgate
operation 36
– compartments in cargo
area 118
– increasing cargo area 117
– opening rear window 34
– opening tailgate 35
– panorama glass sunroof 43
– rear window wiper 66
– rear window wiper, changing
wiper blade 211
– releasing fuel filler door in
event of electrical
malfunction 194
– roll-up cover 117
– roll-up cover for cargo
area 117
– self-leveling suspension 89
– separation net 118
– socket in cargo area 116
– storage area package 119
– tail lamps, replacing
bulbs 214
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 86
"Star button" 53
Star button 53
Start/Stop button 58
"Start" for stopwatch 82
"Start guidance" 136, 144
Starting, refer to Starting
engine 59
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 220
Starting assistant 125
Starting difficulties
– jump starting 220
– refer to Special starting
conditions 59

Tachometer 74
"Tailgate" 36
Tailgate 33, 35
– automatic operation 36
– locking and unlocking from
inside 32
– opening from inside, Sports
Wagon 35
Tail lamps 213
– replacing bulbs 213
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 230
Target cursor for
navigation 138
Technical alterations, refer to
For your own safety 5
Technical data 226
Telematic, refer to
TeleService,
BMW Assist 187

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

Telephone, refer to Mobile
phone 174
"Telephone list" 53
TeleService 187
– enabling 187
– services offered 188
Temperature
– adjusting in upper body
region 106
– adjusting with automatic
climate control 106
– of coolant, refer to Coolant
temperature 74
Temperature display
– outside temperature 74
– setting units 84
– temperature warning 74
Temperature warning 74
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 66
"Terminate services" 190
"Text language" 84
"Theater", refer to Tone
control 154
The individual vehicle 5
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 214
Through-loading system 116
Tightening torque of the lug
bolts, refer to After
mounting 217
Tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 52
"Time" 83
"Time format" 83
Timer, refer to Preselecting
activation time 109
"Timer 1" for parked car
ventilation 110
"Timer 2" for parked car
ventilation 110
Tire inflation pressures 196
Tire pressure loss 90, 91
Tire pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 91
Tire Quality Grading 200

Mobility

Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 196
Sun blinds 112
"Surround Settings", refer to
Tone control 154
SW, waveband 156
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching between high
beams and low beams,
automatic, refer to Highbeam assistant 103
Switching cooling function on
and off 107
Switching off engine 60
Switching off tilt alarm
sensor 38
Switching on
– audio 152
– CD changer 152
– CD player 152
– radio 152
Switching on hour signal 83
Swiveling headlamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 102
Symbols 4
– indicator/warning lamps 13

Reference

Starting off on slopes, refer to
Starting assistant 125
Start menu, iDrive 17
"Start route guidance" 138
"Start service" 189
"State / Province" for destination entry 134
"State inspection" 78
Station, refer to Radio 156
"Stations", presets 163
"Status" 78
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steering wheel
– adjustment 52
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– easy entry/exit 52
– heating 52
– lock 58
– locking 58
– memory 47
– programmable buttons 53
"Steering wheel buttons" 53
Steering-wheel shift buttons,
refer to Shift paddles 62
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 93
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 63
"Stop" for stopwatch 82
"Stopwatch" 82
Stopwatch 81
Storage area package 119
Storage compartments 114
"Store in address book" for
navigation system 140
"Store" on the radio 158, 163
Storing current position 140
Storing radio stations 158
Storing sitting position, refer
to Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 47
Storing tires 202
Straps, refer to Loading 128
"Street" for destination
entry 135

Everything from A to Z

Tire replacement, new wheels
and tires 201
Tires
– age 200
– air loss 90, 92
– breaking-in 124
– changing 201
– condition 201
– damage 201
– flat tire, refer to Changing
wheels 215
– inflation pressure 196
– new wheels and tires 201
– pressure monitoring 89
– pressure monitoring, refer to
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 91
– replacing 215
– retreaded tires 202
– run-flat tires 201
– size 199
– tread 201
– wear indicators 201
– wheel/tire combination 201
– winter tires 202
"Tone" 153
Tone dialing method 182
Tone in audio mode
– adjusting 153
– middle setting 155
Tone on locking/unlocking 31
Tools, refer to Onboard
toolkit 211
"Top 8" for mobile phone 180
Torque
– engine 226
– lug bolts, refer to After
mounting 217
Touch tone dialing, refer to
Tone dialing method 182
Tow fitting 221
Towing 221
– tow fitting 221
"Town / City" for destination
entry 134
Tow-starting 221, 223
"TPM" 92

TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 91
– resetting system 92
– system limits 91
– warning light 92
Tracks
– random play sequence 168
– sample scan 167
Track width, refer to
Dimensions 227
Traction-assist feature, refer
to DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 86
Traction control, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 86
Traffic congestion, refer to
Bypassing route
sections 148
Transmission
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– deactivating selector lever
interlock on automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 64
– manual transmission 60
– SMG Sequential Manual
Transmission 61
– starting assistant 125
Transporting children
safely 54
Transport securing device,
refer to Securing cargo 128
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 201
Treble, refer to Tone
control 153
"Treble", tone control 154
"Trip computer" 77
Trip computer 76
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 74
"Triple turn signal
activation" 65
Trip odometer 74
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 227

Turn signals 64
– indicator lamp 12
– replacing bulbs 213

U
Underbody protection, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 200
"Units" 84
Units
– average fuel
consumption 84
– temperature 84
Universal garage-door
opener, refer to Integrated
universal remote
control 111
Universal remote control 111
"Unlock button" 30
Unlocking
– from inside 33
– from outside 30
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 38
Unlocking without key, refer to
Comfort access 38
"Update services" 190
"Use current location as
address" 140, 142
Used batteries
– refer to Disposal 218
– refer to Replacing battery 40

X
xDrive 87
Xenon lamps 213
– replacing bulbs 213

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation

Warning lamps, refer to
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 79
Warning triangle 219
Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian
models 209
Washer fluid 66
– capacity of the reservoir 66
Washer fluid reservoir 66
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 125
Waveband for radio 156
"WB" 152, 160
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 201
Weather news flashes 159
Website 4
Weights 229
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to New wheels and tires 201
Wheel/tire damage 201
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 227
Wheels and tires 196
Width, refer to
Dimensions 227
Windows 40
– auto-remote operation from
outside 32
– comfort operation with
comfort access 39
– convenience operation 31
– rear window, Sports
Wagon 34
– safety switch 41

Communications Entertainment

Windshield
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 66
– defrosting, refer to
Defrosting windows 107
– displays, refer to Head-Up
Display 96
Windshield washer system
– refer to Wiper system 65
– windshield washer
nozzles 66
Windshield wipers, refer to
Washer system 65
– wiper blade
replacement 211
Winter tires 202
– setting speed limit 81
– storage 202
Wiper blade replacement 211
Wiper system 65
– rain sensor 65
– washer fluid 66
– windshield washer
nozzles 66
"With highways" for
navigation system 143
Word matching principle for
navigation 143
Working in the engine
compartment 204
Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer
to Onboard toolkit 211

Z
"Zoom" with BMW Night
Vision 100

Mobility

Valve screw caps, refer to
After mounting 217
Vehicle
– battery 217
– breaking-in 124
– care 210
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– dimensions 227
– loading 126
– parking 60
– washing, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
– weights 229
Vehicle jack 215
– jacking points 216
Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current
position 148
"Vehicle settings" for
unlocking 30
Ventilation 108
– draft-free 108
– in the rear 109
– while stationary 109
Venting, refer to
Ventilation 108
Vent outlets of the automatic
climate control 105
Vents, refer to Ventilation 108
"Vent settings" 107
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance with voice
instructions 147
Voice command system 22
– short commands 231
Voice instructions for
navigation system 147
– muting 53
– repeating 53, 147
– switching on/off 53, 147
– volume 147
Voice phone book 184

Volume 152
– audio sources 152
– mobile phone 178
– setting speeddependent 154
– voice instructions 147

Reference

Refueling
So that you will have important specifications
available when you stop to refuel, we recommend that you supplement the following tables
with data which apply to your vehicle. Consult
the index for individual specifications.

Fuel
Designation

Please enter your preferred fuel here.

Engine oil
Quality

Tire inflation pressure
Summer tires
Front

Rear

Winter tires
Front

Up to 4 persons
5 persons or 4 plus luggage

Rear

More about BMW

The Ultimate
Driving Machine

01 41 0 012 211 ue

bmwusa.com

5 US-En

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V1.2 (40-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Copy, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res
Page Count                      : 259
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:f79367b6-4dd0-4f34-a374-16e76b7fa666
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2006:02:02 09:42:48Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.0
Modify Date                     : 2006:02:02 10:39:27+01:00
Metadata Date                   : 2006:02:02 10:39:27+01:00
Document ID                     : uuid:e1a5f930-94a4-4049-ac8b-c5afa6e611f3
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : untitled
Creator                         : FrameMaker 7.0

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Bmw 2006 530I Sedan Owners Manual

Bmw-2006-525I-Sedan-Owners-Manual-761977 bmw-2006-525i-sedan-owners-manual-761977

Bmw-2006-530Xi-Sedan-Owners-Manual-694375 bmw-2006-530xi-sedan-owners-manual-694375

Bmw-2006-550I-Sedan-Owners-Manual-694376 bmw-2006-550i-sedan-owners-manual-694376

Bmw-2006-525I-Sedan-Owners-Manual-694372 bmw-2006-525i-sedan-owners-manual-694372

Bmw-2006-525Xi-Sedan-Owners-Manual-694373 bmw-2006-525xi-sedan-owners-manual-694373

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation